Page 1
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 1/254
3900 Series Base Station
V100R009C00
LMT User Guide
Issue Draft C
Date 2014-03-26
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Page 2
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 2/254
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
Page 3
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 3/254
About This Document
Purpose
This document describes how to log in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT) for 3900 series
base stations and how to use the LMT to operate and maintain 3900 series base stations.
NOTE
Unless otherwise stated, a base station in the following part of this document refers to a 3900 series base
station.
Product Version
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Product Version
DBS3900-1U NodeB: V200R016C00
BTS3900-1U
DBS3900 V100R009C00
The mapping single-mode base station versions
are:
l eGBTS: V100R016C00
l NodeB: V200R016C00
l eNodeB: V100R007C00
BTS3900
BTS3900A
BTS3900L
BTS3900AL
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l System engineers
l Field engineers
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide About This Document
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
Page 4
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 4/254
l Network shift engineers
l Network operators
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide About This Document
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Page 5
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 5/254
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide..........................................................1
2 Introduction to the LMT...............................................................................................................4
2.1 Definitions of LMT........................................................................................................................................................6
2.2 Types of LMT.................................................................................................................................................................6
2.3 Functions of the LMT.....................................................................................................................................................7
2.4 System Requirements for LMT Installation...................................................................................................................8
2.5 Installing and Verifying the LMT Application Software.............................................................................................10
2.5.1 Installing the LMT Application Software.................................................................................................................10
2.5.2 Verifying the LMT Application Software.................................................................................................................13
2.6 Components of the LMT Main Window......................................................................................................................14
2.7 LMT Offline Tools.......................................................................................................................................................17
2.7.1 Installing the LMT Offline Tool................................................................................................................................18
2.7.2 Operations Related to LMT Offline MML................................................................................................................19
2.7.3 Traffic Recording Review Tool.................................................................................................................................23
2.7.4 FTP Client..................................................................................................................................................................24
2.8 Configuring an Emergency OM Channel.....................................................................................................................26
2.9 Obtain Documentation List..........................................................................................................................................27
3 Getting Started with the LMT...................................................................................................29
3.1 Logging In to and Exiting the LMT.............................................................................................................................30
3.2 Managing Rights...........................................................................................................................................................34
3.2.1 Concepts Related to Rights Management..................................................................................................................35
3.2.2 Managing User Accounts..........................................................................................................................................39
3.2.3 Managing Login Passwords.......................................................................................................................................40
3.2.4 Managing Command Groups.....................................................................................................................................42
3.3 Setting Of fice Information on the LMT.......................................................................................................................42
4 Running MML Commands........................................................................................................46
4.1 Basic Concepts Related to MML Commands..............................................................................................................47
4.1.1 Introduction to MML Commands..............................................................................................................................47
4.1.2 Components of the MML Command Window..........................................................................................................48
4.2 Running a Single MML Command..............................................................................................................................50
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide Contents
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
Page 6
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 6/254
4.3 Running MML Commands in Batches.........................................................................................................................51
4.4 Checking the Syntax.....................................................................................................................................................53
4.5 Setting Parameters........................................................................................................................................................54
5 Managing Alarms and Events...................................................................................................555.1 Basic Concepts Related to Alarms or Events...............................................................................................................56
5.1.1 Alarm or Event Categories........................................................................................................................................56
5.1.2 Alarm Severity...........................................................................................................................................................56
5.1.3 NM Alarm Type........................................................................................................................................................57
5.1.4 Alarm Flags...............................................................................................................................................................58
5.2 Handling Alarms and Events........................................................................................................................................59
5.2.1 Setting Alarm or Event Query Properties..................................................................................................................59
5.2.2 Browsing Active Alarms or Events...........................................................................................................................60
5.2.3 Querying Alarm or Event Logs.................................................................................................................................60
5.2.4 Querying Alarm or Event Configurations.................................................................................................................62
5.2.5 Querying Alarm or Event Handling Suggestions......................................................................................................63
5.2.6 Manually Refreshing Alarms or Events....................................................................................................................64
5.2.7 Manually Clearing Alarms or Events........................................................................................................................64
5.2.8 Deleting Cleared Alarms or Events...........................................................................................................................65
5.2.9 Saving the Information About Alarms or Events......................................................................................................65
6 Managing Message Tracing.......................................................................................................66
6.1 Overview of Message Tracing......................................................................................................................................67
6.2 General O perations Related to Message Tracing............................................................................................... ..........696.2.1 Browsing Traced Messages Online...........................................................................................................................69
6.2.2 Viewing Message Details..........................................................................................................................................70
6.2.3 Saving Traced Messages...........................................................................................................................................71
6.2.4 Browsing Traced Messages Offline..........................................................................................................................72
6.3 Common Tracing Tasks................................................................................................................................................75
6.3.1 PTP Trace..................................................................................................................................................................75
6.3.2 MAC Tr ace................................................................................................................................................................77
6.3.3 LACP Trace...............................................................................................................................................................80
6.3.4 PPP Trace..................................................................................................................................................................81
6.3.5 MP Trace...................................................................................................................................................................83
6.3.6 IP Layer Protocol Trace.............................................................................................................................................84
6.3.7 SCTP Trace................................................................................................................................................................87
6.3.8 CMPV2 Trace............................................................................................................................................................89
6.3.9 IKE Trace..................................................................................................................................................................90
6.3.10 PNP Trace................................................................................................................................................................92
6.3.11 Proxy PNP Trace.....................................................................................................................................................93
6.3.12 ICP Tr ace.................................................................................................................................................................94
6.3.13 SAAL Trace.............................................................................................................................................................95
6.3.14 HDLC Trace............................................................................................................................................................96
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide Contents
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
Page 7
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 7/254
6.3.15 IUANT Trace...........................................................................................................................................................98
6.3.16 485 Trace...............................................................................................................................................................100
6.3.17 IPMI Trace.............................................................................................................................................................101
6.3.18 RF Link Trace........................................................................................................................................................103
6.3.19 Process Message Trace..........................................................................................................................................104
6.3.20 RF Message Trace.................................................................................................................................................106
6.4 GSM-specific Tracing Tasks......................................................................................................................................107
6.4.1 Tracing RSL Messages over the Abis Interface in the CS Domain........................................................................107
6.4.2 Tracing CSL Messages over the Abis Interface in the CS Domain........................................................................108
6.4.3 Sampling Carriers and RF Modules........................................................................................................................109
6.5 UMTS-specific Tracing Tasks....................................................................................................................................110
6.5.1 DSP Trace................................................................................................................................................................110
6.5.2 Cell Trace................................................................................................................................................................112
6.5.3 User Trace................................................................................................................................................................114
6.5.4 Iub Trace..................................................................................................................................................................116
6.6 LTE-specific Tracing Tasks.......................................................................................................................................117
6.6.1 S1 Inter face Trace....................................................................................................................................................118
6.6.2 X2 Inter face Trace...................................................................................................................................................119
6.6.3 Uu Inter face Trace...................................................................................................................................................121
6.6.4 IFTS Tr ace...............................................................................................................................................................122
6.6.5 M2 Interface Trace..................................................................................................................................................125
6.6.6 Se Interf ace Trace....................................................................................................................................................126
7 Managing Performance Monitoring......................................................................................128
7.1 Overview of Real-time Performance Monitoring.......................................................................................................129
7.2 General O perations Related to Real-time Performance Monitoring..........................................................................130
7.2.1 Browsing Performance Monitoring Results Online................................................................................................131
7.2.2 Setting the Chart Display Mode..............................................................................................................................131
7.2.3 Saving Performance Monitoring Results.................................................................................................................132
7.2.4 Browsing Performance Monitoring Results Offline................................................................................................132
7.3 Common Monitoring Tasks........................................................................................................................................133
7.3.1 Transport Port Traffic Monitoring...........................................................................................................................133
7.3.2 Transport Link Traffic Monitoring..........................................................................................................................136
7.3.3 IP Performance Monitoring.....................................................................................................................................138
7.3.4 IPsec Performance Monitoring................................................................................................................................139
7.3.5 Local Pass-By Traffic Monitoring...........................................................................................................................140
7.3.6 IP Clock Data Collection Monitoring......................................................................................................................141
7.3.7 Clock Quality Test Monitor.....................................................................................................................................142
7.3.8 CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring...................................................................................................................................143
7.3.9 Board Temperature Monitoring...............................................................................................................................144
7.3.10 RRU/R FU Output Power Monitoring....................................................................................................................145
7.3.11 Rx Frequency Scanning.........................................................................................................................................147
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide Contents
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
Page 8
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 8/254
7.3.12 DTF Test................................................................................................................................................................148
7.3.13 FFT Frequency Scan..............................................................................................................................................150
7.3.14 Board RTWP.........................................................................................................................................................152
7.3.15 Antenna Radiation Pattern.....................................................................................................................................153
7.3.16 Transport OAM Monitoring..................................................................................................................................154
7.3.17 Frequency Scanning Intermodulation Interference Detection...............................................................................155
7.3.18 Transport Auto Setup User Plane Monitoring.......................................................................................................157
7.3.19 DTP Test................................................................................................................................................................159
7.4 GSM-Specific Monitoring Tasks................................................................................................................................160
7.4.1 Monitor ing Offline Spectrum Scan.........................................................................................................................160
7.4.2 Monitor ing Online Spectrum Scan..........................................................................................................................162
7.4.3 Monitor ing Voice Coding and Decoding................................................................................................................163
7.5 UMTS-specific Monitoring Tasks..............................................................................................................................164
7.5.1 HSPA Monitoring....................................................................................................................................................164
7.5.2 Measuring Sector Equipment Group RTWP...........................................................................................................166
7.5.3 Cell Thr oughput Statistic.........................................................................................................................................166
7.5.4 Cell Ser vice Resource Query...................................................................................................................................167
7.5.5 Cell RTWP..............................................................................................................................................................168
7.5.6 Frequency Scan Monitoring....................................................................................................................................169
7.6 LTE-specific Monitoring Tasks..................................................................................................................................171
7.6.1 Sector Performance Detect......................................................................................................................................171
7.6.2 Cell Per formance Monitoring..................................................................................................................................172
8 Maintaining the Base Station..................................................................................................174
8.1 Device Panel Operations............................................................................................................................................175
8.1.1 Introduction to the Device Panel.............................................................................................................................175
8.1.2 Starting the Device Panel........................................................................................................................................176
8.1.3 Querying the Board Version Information................................................................................................................176
8.1.4 Listing Active Alarms.............................................................................................................................................177
8.1.5 Resetting a Board.....................................................................................................................................................177
8.1.6 Querying the Current Version Information of the Base Station..............................................................................178
8.1.7 Blocking a Board.....................................................................................................................................................179
8.1.8 Unblock ing a Board.................................................................................................................................................180
8.1.9 Querying the Clock Status.......................................................................................................................................180
8.1.10 Querying the Board Status.....................................................................................................................................181
8.1.11 Querying the Software Version of the Base Station..............................................................................................182
8.1.12 Querying the CPU/DSP Usage..............................................................................................................................182
8.1.13 Querying the Manufacturing Information of a Board............................................................................................183
8.1.14 Querying the E1/T1 Port Status.............................................................................................................................183
8.2 Common Maintenance Tasks.....................................................................................................................................184
8.2.1 Concepts Related to Software and Files..................................................................................................................184
8.2.2 Configuring the FTP Server....................................................................................................................................185
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide Contents
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
Page 9
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 9/254
8.2.3 Downloading and Activating the Software and Data Configuration File................................................................188
8.2.4 Extra Configuration File Transfer...........................................................................................................................192
8.2.5 Device Archive Transfer..........................................................................................................................................193
8.2.6 Data Configuration File Transfer............................................................................................................................194
8.2.7 Other File Transfer..................................................................................................................................................196
8.2.8 IP Trans port Self Test..............................................................................................................................................198
8.3 Maintaining the GSM Base Station............................................................................................................................199
8.3.1 Querying Frequency Scan.......................................................................................................................................199
8.3.2 Configuring Frequency Scan...................................................................................................................................200
8.3.3 Monitor ing Channel Status......................................................................................................................................201
8.3.4 Testing Channel Loopback......................................................................................................................................202
8.3.5 Testing TRX Loopback...........................................................................................................................................203
8.3.6 Modifying the Cell Management Status..................................................................................................................204
8.3.7 Testing Idle Timeslot...............................................................................................................................................205
8.4 Maintaining the LTE Base Station.............................................................................................................................206
8.4.1 Engineering Quality Check.....................................................................................................................................206
8.5 Maintenance................................................................................................................................................................207
8.5.1 Emergency Diagnosis..............................................................................................................................................207
8.5.2 CANBUS Emergency Diagnosis.............................................................................................................................209
8.5.3 EmergencyDiag Command......................................................................................................................................210
8.6 BTS Self-test...............................................................................................................................................................211
9 FAQ..............................................................................................................................................213
9.1 How to Switch a Minimum LMT Package to a Complete LMT Package..................................................................217
9.2 Functions of the LMT Become Abnormal After an LMT Version Upgrade or Rollback..........................................219
9.3 How to Increase the LMT Response Speed During the Use of the Firefox Browser.................................................221
9.4 How to Handle Incorrect Display of Colors of the LMT Main Window...................................................................221
9.5 How to Handle Failed Display of the Verify Code in the LMT Login Dialog Box...................................................222
9.6 How to Handle No Responses to the Operations Performed on the Menu of the LMT Main Window.....................222
9.7 How to Clear Garbled Characters That Occurred in a CSV File in UTF-8 Coding...................................................223
9.8 How to Set a Correct SSL Security Certificate..........................................................................................................224
9.9 How to R ectify Errors That Occurr While Saving a File...........................................................................................226
9.10 How to Avoid the Failure to Log In to the LMT Due to a High Default Internet Explorer Security Level............226
9.11 How to Handle the Slow Redirection After Logging in to the LMT.......................................................................228
9.12 How to Handle the LMT Interface Disorder............................................................................................................229
9.13 How to Handle the Unknown Error Occurrs on LMT Interface or MML Command Execution Failure After a Browser
Upgrade............................................................................................................................................................................229
9.14 How to Handle Error Message Displayed on the LMT or No Responses to Operations Performed on the LMT Login
Window............................................................................................................................................................................230
9.15 How to Install OS Patches........................................................................................................................................231
9.16 What Do I Do if Tracing, Monitoring or Other Functions Cannot Be Used?..........................................................231
9.17 What Do I Do If There Is No Response or Any Error Message After a Tracing, Monitoring or Other Task Is Created..........................................................................................................................................................................................234
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide Contents
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
Page 10
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 10/254
9.18 How to Handle the Problem That Only the Error Code Is Displayed in an Error Message After a Tracing or Monitoring
Task Is Created.................................................................................................................................................................235
9.19 Any Further Operation Performed When Some LMT Web Pages Fail to Update Causes the Web Pages to Turn Blank
..........................................................................................................................................................................................235
9.20 How to Handle the LMT Exit After Clicking Trace, Monitor, or Device Maintenance Tab in Window 7.........236
9.21 How to Handle the Disconnection Between the LMT and Base Station After the Device Digital Certificate Is Replaced
..........................................................................................................................................................................................237
9.22 How to Handle Exceptions in the LMT Due to Insufficient PC Memory................................................................237
9.23 Error Message "This user session already exists" Upon Login to LMT..................................................................238
9.24 Interfaces for Performing Tracing or Monitoring Tasks Blinking...........................................................................239
9.25 The web site's certificate cannot be verified.Do you want to continue? Is Displayed During Tracing or Monitoring
..........................................................................................................................................................................................239
9.26 Batch Execution of MML Commands Fails Because Some MML Commands Contain Invisible Carriage Returns or
Line Feeds.........................................................................................................................................................................240
9.27 How to Handle Shortcut Key Invalidation...............................................................................................................241
9.28 What Do I Do If A Message "Stop running this script?" Is Displayed?...................................................................241
9.29 A Message checking client environment... Is Displayed on the Login Window and the browser Does Not Respond
..........................................................................................................................................................................................242
9.30 LMT Login Window Being Stopped by the Browser..............................................................................................242
9.31 The Application Blocked by Security Settings Dialog Box Is Displayed When Batch Processing, Tracing,
Monitoring, or Device Maintenance Is Enabled...............................................................................................................243
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide Contents
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
Page 11
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 11/254
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station LMT
User Guide
This chapter describes the changes in 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide.
Draft C (2014-03-26)
This is the release of Draft C.
Compared with Draft B (2014-02-28), this issue includes the following new topics:
l 9.31 The Application Blocked by Security Settings Dialog Box Is Displayed When
Batch Processing, Tracing, Monitoring, or Device Maintenance Is Enabled
Compared with Draft B (2014-02-28), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic Change Description
7.3.14 Board RTWP Added the reference RTWP values of the
pRRU3901 in Context.
3.1 Logging In to and Exiting the LMT Added the description that different
passwords are used for logging in to the LMT
in a new base station delivery or upgrade
scenario.
8.2.4 Extra Configuration File Transfer Added the scenario when the extra
configuration files are encrypted.
Compared with Draft B (2014-02-28), this issue does not exclude any topics.
Draft B (2014-02-28)
This is the release of Draft B.
Compared with Draft A (2014-01-20), this issue includes the following new topics:
l 7.5.2 Measuring Sector Equipment Group RTWP
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
Page 12
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 12/254
l 9.30 LMT Login Window Being Stopped by the Browser
l 7.3.19 DTP Test
Compared with Draft A (2014-01-20), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic Change Description
3.1 Logging In to and Exiting the LMT Added the description that different local
maintenance IP addresses are used during the
UMPT upgrade or new UMPT delivery.
6.3.15 IUANT Trace Added the description in Context that the
pRRU3901 does not support these functions.7.3.6 IP Clock Data Collection Monitoring
7.3.7 Clock Quality Test Monitor
7.3.11 Rx Frequency Scanning
3.3 Setting Office Information on the LMT Added the description that different local
maintenance IP addresses are used during the
WMPT upgrade or new WMPT delivery.
7.3.10 RRU/RFU Output Power
Monitoring
Added pilot power and typical power of the
pRRU3901 in Context.
7.6.1 Sector Performance Detect Added the uplink bandwidth supported by the
pRRU3901.
8.2.2 Configuring the FTP Server Optimized the description of step 3.
Compared with Draft A (2014-01-20), this issue does not exclude any topics.
Draft A (2014-01-20)
This is the release of Draft A.
Compared with issue 02 (2013-11-08) of V100R 008C01, this issue includes the following new
topics:
l 6.6.6 Se Interface Trace
Compared with issue 02 (2013-11-08) of V100R008C01, this issue includes the following
changes:
Topic Change Description
The whole document Modified M2000 to U2000.
2.6 Components of the LMT Main Window Deleted the Lockup item in the LMT main
window.
6.6.4 IFTS Trace Modified the parameters for IFTS message
tracing and the tracing results.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
Page 13
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 13/254
Topic Change Description
6.5.3 User Trace Added the parameter Fault Type and related
descriptions.
7.6.1 Sector Performance Detect Added the Context in the section "Sector
Performance Detect".
8.3.3 Monitoring Channel Status Added the precautions in Context.
8.3.2 Configuring Frequency Scan Added the parameter Sector ID and related
descriptions.8.3.1 Querying Frequency Scan
8.3.7 Testing Idle Timeslot
8.3.5 Testing TRX Loopback Modified the parameter setting description
tables.
8.3.7 Testing Idle Timeslot
Compared with issue 02 (2013-11-08) of V100R008C01, the following information is deleted
from this issue:
l Board Service Resource Query
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
Page 14
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 14/254
2 Introduction to the LMT
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the functions, system requirements, and main window of the local
maintenance terminal (LMT).
2.1 Definitions of LMT
Before you use the local maintenance terminal (LMT), you need to know the following concepts:
LMT, LMT PC, and LMT software.
2.2 Types of LMT
The LMT consists of the built-in WebLMT and external WebLMT depending on different
application scenarios.
2.3 Functions of the LMT
The local maintenance terminal (LMT) is used to assist with base station deployment, and locally
locate and fix faults.
2.4 System R equirements for LMT Installation
This section describes the system requirements for the local maintenance terminal (LMT)
installation.
2.5 Installing and Verifying the LMT Application Software
This chapter describes how to install the local maintenance terminal (LMT) application software
and how to verify the installation.
2.6 Components of the LMT Main Window
This section describes the components of the local maintenance terminal (LMT) main window
and the functions of each component.
2.7 LMT Offline Tools
LMT offline tools include the traffic recording review tool, offline MML tool, FTP client, and
HedEx Lite.
2.8 Configuring an Emergency OM Channel
For a separate-MPT multimode base station, an emergency OM channel is used to maintain a
faulty base station through the OM channel of a normal base station. The maintenance includes
proxy PNP tracing and operations using MML commands for the faulty base station through the
emergency OM channel of the normal base station.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
Page 15
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 15/254
2.9 Obtain Documentation List
This section describes how to query and obtain documentation packages of the corresponding
product version.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
Page 16
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 16/254
2.1 Definitions of LMT
Before you use the local maintenance terminal (LMT), you need to know the following concepts:LMT, LMT PC, and LMT software.
LMT
The LMT is a logical concept. It refers to an operation and maintenance (OM) terminal installed
with the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal software and connected to the OM network for
the base station. You can use the LMT to operate and maintain the base station.
LMT PC
The LMT PC is a hardware concept. It refers to a computer where the Huawei Local MaintenanceTerminal software is installed.
LMT Software
The LMT software refers to the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal software developed by
Huawei and installed on the LMT PC.
2.2 Types of LMT
The LMT consists of the built-in WebLMT and external WebLMT depending on different
application scenarios.
Table 2-1 lists the application scenarios for the built-in WebLMT and external WebLMT.
Table 2-1 Application scenarios for the built-in WebLMT and external WebLMT
Type Application Scenario How to Start the WebLMT
Built-in
WebLMT
l The UMPT works as the
main control board and
UMTS or LTE base
stations are deployed, that
is, the base station works in
GU, GL, GUL, UO, or LO
mode.
l Both the following
conditions are ture: The
UMPT works as the main
control board and only
GSM base stations are
deployed. The GSM base
station has an OM
bandwidth greater than 64
kbit/s.
Start the IE browser, enter the IP address
of the base station in the address box, and
click Enter to log in to the WebLMT.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
Page 17
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 17/254
Type Application Scenario How to Start the WebLMT
External
WebLMT
l For the base station that
uses the WMPT as the
main control board.l Both the following
conditions are ture: The
UMPT works as the main
control board and only
GSM base stations are
deployed. The GSM base
station has an OM
bandwidth less than or
equal to 64 kbit/s.
After the LMT application software is
successfully installed, log in to the LMT
using either of the following methods:l Choose Start > All Programs >
HUAWEI Local Maintenance
Terminal > Local Maintenance
Terminal, The Local Maintenance
Terminal window is displayed.
l If the LMT service manager is started,
enter https://127.0.0.1:820 in the
address box of the browser and click
Enter.
NOTE
l After the LMT service manager starts, an
icon will be displayed at the right of
the taskbar. If the LMT service manager is
not started, start it by choosing Start > All
Programs > HUAWEI Local
Maintenance Terminal > Local
WebLMT Service.
The service port number is 820 by default. If
the service port number of the local WebLMT
is changed, ensure that the entered port number
is consistent with the changed service port.
For details about how to install the application Web Local Maintenance Terminal, see 2.5
Installing and Verifying the LMT Application Software.
2.3 Functions of the LMT
The local maintenance terminal (LMT) is used to assist with base station deployment, and locally
locate and fix faults.
Use the LMT to operate and maintain a base station in the following scenarios:
l When the operation and maintenance (OM) channel between the base station and U2000
is unavailable, use the LMT to deploy the base station locally.
l When communication between the base station and the U2000 is interrupted, use the LMT
to locate and fix the faults.
l When alarms are generated on the base station and related boards must be locally replaced,
use the LMT to locate and fix the faults.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
Page 18
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 18/254
NOTE
When the base station is appropriately communicating with the U2000, it is recommended that you operate
and maintain the base station on the U2000. When you must obtain real-time information about a base
station from the U2000 to locate faults, the U2000 may fail to provide adequate information because it
manages many network elements (NEs). In this situation, use the LMT to operate and maintain the basestation.
The LMT provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI), which helps users operate and maintain
the base station on the Web. The LMT implements the following local OM functions:
l Executes man-machine language (MML) commands
l Manages alarms and events
l Runs MML commands in batches
l Traces messages
l Monitors base station performance
l Maintains equipment
l Enables the base station to perform self-tests
NOTE
The LMT records user operations, such as login, deregistration, user addition, and user removal, in the
operation log. You can run the ULD LOG command to export and view the operation log. For details about
to how to use this command, see the related MML command reference.
2.4 System Requirements for LMT Installation
This section describes the system requirements for the local maintenance terminal (LMT)
installation.
Hardware Configurations
Table 2-2 lists the hardware requirements for the LMT PC.
Table 2-2 Hardware configurations
Item RecommendedConfiguration
Minimum Configuration
CPU 2.8 GHz or higher 866 MHz
RAM 1 GB 512 MB
Hard disk 80 GB 10 GB
Video card resolution 1024 x 768 or higher 1024 x 768
CD-ROM drive - -
Network interface card 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s
Others A keyboard, a mouse, a
modem, an audio card, and a
sound box
A keyboard and a mouse
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
Page 19
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 19/254
Software Configurations
Table 2-3 describes the software requirements for the PC where the LMT is to be installed.
Table 2-3 Software configurations
Item Recommended Configuration
Operating system l Microsoft Windows Server 2003 with patch KB938397
l Microsoft Windows Server 2008
l Microsoft Windows Vista
l Microsoft Windows 7
NOTE
Currently, the LMT supports only web browsers and 32-bit operatingsystems.
Default language of the
operating system
English (United States)
Web browser l Internet Explorer 8 (recommended)
l Internet Explorer 9 (recommended)
l Firefox 3.X (X indicates a digit, recommended)
l Firefox 10.X (X indicates a digit, recommended)
l Internet Explorer 7 (not recommended)
NOTE
l You must set the security level of the web browser to medium or
low. Otherwise, the LMT menus cannot be viewed.
l If the LMT is terminated abnormally or does not respond when
you use the Internet Explorer of a version earlier than Internet
Explorer 8, you are advised to upgrade Internet Explorer 6 or 7 to
Internet Explorer 8.
l Internet Explorer 6 and internet Explorer 10 or later is not
recommended.
l Firefox of a version other than Firefox 3.X and Firefox 10.X is not
supported.
l If Firefox 10.X is used, the plug-ins of the Firefox applicationcenter must be disabled.
l If a non-recommended web browser is used to log in to LMT, the
message You are recommended to use Windows Internet
Explorer 8, 9, or Firefox 3.6 to access WebLMT; otherwise,
other browsers may be incompatible with WebLMT. will be
displayed.
l On the Advanced tab page in the Internet Options dialog box,
select all check boxes under HTTP1.1 settings.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
Page 20
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 20/254
Item Recommended Configuration
JAVA Platform Standard
Edition Runtime
Environment (JRE)
jre-6u26-windows-i586-p-s.exe
NOTE
This plug-in can be downloaded from the Java official website http:// java.com/.
Port Requirements
If a firewall exists between the base station and the LMT PC, ports 20, 21, and 80 must be enabled
on the firewall. If Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS) needs to be used, ports 20, 21,
and 443 must be enabled on the firewall.
NOTE
l Ports 20 and 21 are used for the File Transfer Protocol (FTP). They need to be enabled in the case
of file transfer using FTP.
l Port 80 is used for the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) by default. The port is used for web
browsing by default.
l Port 443 is used for the HTTPS protocol by default.
l HTTP does not ensure secure access. That is, data transmitted between the LMT and NEs can be
easily intercepted and decrypted. Therefore, you are advised to use HTTPS to access the NEs.
Communication Capability
The LMT PC must support TCP/IP protocols.
The minimum effective bandwidth for the LMT is 512 Kbit/s. The recommended bandwidth is
2 Mbit/s or larger.
NOTE
l The network bandwidth limits the web page opening speed. If the recommended effective bandwidth
is provided, the LMT runs fast. If the minimum effective network bandwidth is provided, all the
functions can be performed but the LMT runs slowly.
l The effective bandwidth is the bandwidth occupied by the LMT. If multiple applications compete
for the bandwidth, the LMT may run slowly even if a 2 Mbit/s bandwidth is provided.
2.5 Installing and Verifying the LMT Application SoftwareThis chapter describes how to install the local maintenance terminal (LMT) application software
and how to verify the installation.
2.5.1 Installing the LMT Application Software
This section describes how to install the local maintenance terminal (LMT) application software
on the LMT PC.
Prerequisites
l You have obtained the installation CD-ROM and installation instructions from Huawei.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
Page 21
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 21/254
l You have obtained the valid CD KEY for the LMT application software.
l You have logged in to the LMT PC as an administrator.
Context
l The PC user for installing the LMT application software must be configured with
administrator rights so that the user has the write rights on drive C. Otherwise, the PC user
will fail to log in to the LMT using the U2000 proxy function.
l LMT software installation scenario I: For the base stations that use the WMPT as the main
control board, the LMT application software is locally installed to maintain these base
stations.
l LMT software installation scenario II: The LMT is locally installed to maintain the eGBTS.
The maximum transmission rate of the original LMT for maintaining the GSM BTS is low,
that is, 64 kbit/s. At this rate, the LMT maintenance efficiency is poor. In this case, the
local installation of the LMT can improve user experience.
NOTE
l The LMT application software must be installed when you use a browser to visit the base station that
uses the WMPT as the main control board through HTTP or HTTPS links.
l Based on the actual requirements, LMT application software can be installed on the separate-MPT
NodeB that uses the WMPT as the main control board or the co-MPT GBTS that uses the UMPT as
the main control board.
l For the base station that uses the UMPT as the main control board, you are advised to log in to the web
LMT by entering the IP address of the base station in the browser for operation and maintenance.
Procedure
Step 1 Insert the installation CD-ROM of the LMT application software into the CD-ROM drive.
In a normal situation, the operating system automatically runs the CD-ROM drive. If the
operating system cannot automatically run the CD-ROM drive, open the folder in the installation
CD-ROM and double-click setup.exe.
NOTE
To install the LMT application software in a 32-bit Windows 7 operating system, perform the following
operations first:
l If the installation package is compressed, right-click the compressed installation package and choose
Properties. In the displayed Properties dialog box, click Compatibility and select Run this program
in compatibility mode for. Then, click OK .
l If the installation package is a folder or is decompressed, right-click setup.exe in the installation
package and chooseProperties. In the displayed Properties dialog box, click Compatibility and select
Run this program in compatibility mode for. Then, click OK .
The compatibility message will not be displayed after the previous operations complete.
Step 2 In the displayed dialog box, select the language.
Step 3 Click OK .
A dialog box displays the introduction of the installation.
Step 4 Click Next.
A dialog box displays the copyright notice.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
Page 22
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 22/254
Step 5 Read the copyright notice. If you agree, choose I accept these terms.
NOTE
The Next button is available only after you choose I accept these terms.
Step 6 Click Next.
A Installation Directory dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Use the default installation path or specify another installation path, and click Next.
NOTE
l If the LMT application software is installed for the first time, the default installation path is D:\HW
LMT.
l If the LMT application software of another version or for another NE has been installed, the default
path is the installation path of the installed LMT application software and cannot be changed.
l If the installation path needs to be changed, uninstall the LMT application software of another
version or for another NE.
Step 8 In the window for selecting components, select the required components and click Next. (You
are advised to select all components.)
A CD KEY dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
If LMT software is running during installation, a Warning dialog box is displayed, prompting you whether
to continue the installation? Click Yes. The running LMT software stops, and the installation continues.
Step 9 Enter the correct CD KEY, and click Next.
A Confirm installation dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
The CD KEY is saved in SN.TXT in the folder of the installation CD-ROM.
The Next button is available only after you enter the correct CD KEY.
Step 10 Confirm the installation information and click Next.
A progress indicator is displayed, showing the installation progress.
After all files are copied, a Initializing Components dialog box showing the component
initializing progress is displayed.
After all programs are installed, a Installation completed dialog box is displayed.
Step 11 Click Finish.
NOTE
To ensure that the installation file can be restored in case of file damage, you are advised to back up the
installation file in a path different from the installation path.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the installation is complete, you can use HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal to start
the following programs:
l Web Local Maintenance Terminal
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
Page 23
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 23/254
l Uninstall Local Maintenance Terminal
NOTICEl A maximum of 30 versions of the LMT application software can be installed on one PC. If
the limit is exceeded, you cannot log in to the LMT. Uninstall the versions no longer to be
used.
l During an upgrade of the LMT, if LmtView Common component under Select Software
Components is selected, the FTP tool started with the LMT will be updated, and the password
of the FTP tool is restored to the default password hwbs@com.
l If the running FTP tool is SingleRAN V100R007C00, NodeB V200R015C00, LTE
V100R005C01, or an earlier version before an upgrade of the LMT, stop the FTP tool and
then perform the upgrade. Ensure that the upgraded LMT can automatically start the FTP
tool of the latest version.
2.5.2 Verifying the LMT Application Software
You can verify the LMT application software installation by starting the LMT.
Context
Table 2-4 describes some folders in the directory structure for the LMT application software
installation.
Table 2-4 Some folders in the directory structure for the LMT application software installation
Directory Description
\adaptor\clientadaptor\MBTS
\version number of the LMT
application software
Saves the web page file for the LMT application
software and related resource files.
\adaptor\serveradaptor\MBTS
\version number of the LMT
application software
Saves executable programs for the local LMT server
and related resource files.
\uninstall Saves the file of component uninstall information.
NOTE
The system automatically creates other folders when related tasks are created and data about the tasks are
saved.
Procedure
l Start the LMT.
Check whether is displayed in the status area of the taskbar. If it is not displayed,
choose Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > Web Local
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
Page 24
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 24/254
Maintenance Terminal to start Web Local Maintenance Terminal. If a login window
is displayed in the browser, the LMT application software has been successfully installed.
NOTE
For details about how to log in to and log out of the LMT, see 3.1 Logging In to and Exiting the
LMT.
----End
2.6 Components of the LMT Main Window
This section describes the components of the local maintenance terminal (LMT) main window
and the functions of each component.
Main Window
Figure 2-1 shows the main window of an LMT for DBS3900 GUL.
Figure 2-1 LMT main window
Table 2-5 describes the components of the LMT main window.
Table 2-5 Components of the LMT main window
No. Component
Parameter Description
1 Status
bar
- Displays the user type, user name, connection status, and
NE time.
2 Function
s
MML Used to run man-machine language (MML) commands.
For details, see 4.1.2 Components of the MML
Command Window.
Alarm/Event Used to query active alarms or events, alarm or event logs,
and alarm or event configurations.
Batch Used to run MML commands in batches.
Trace Used to trace base station messages.
Monitor Used to monitor the base station performance in real time.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
Page 25
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 25/254
No. Component
Parameter Description
Device
Maintenance
Used to manage equipment.
Self Test Enables the base station to perform self-tests.
3 Menu
bar
Configure
Emergent OM
Channel
Click Configure Emergent OM Channel on the LMT.
On the displayed Configure Emergent OM Channel
dialog box, select and configure the target base station
that requires emergency maintenance. For details, see 2.8
Configuring an Emergency OM Channel.
Obtain
Documentati
on List
Choose Obtain Documentation List on the LMT. The
documentation packages of the corresponding product
version are listed in the displayed dialog box. For details,
see 2.9 Obtain Documentation List.
FTP Tool Used to download the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) tool.
1. Click FTP Tool. A File Download - Security
Warning dialog box is displayed.
2. Click Save to save the FTP server software
SFTPServer.exe to the computer where the LMT is
installed.
Command
Group
Settings
Some MML commands, GUI commands, and virtual
commands are added to comprise a command group,
command group is used to add commands to a specifiedcommand group so that an admin user can add operation
authorities for authority-limited users.
1. Click Command Group Settings. The Command
Group Settings dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a customized command group (G_22 to G_31)
from Command group drop-down list.
3. Select the MML command or GUI command to be
added from the left pane, and click . The added
MML command or GUI command is displayed in the
right pane. Then, click Apply.4. Select the MML command or GUI command options
to be removed from the right pane, and click . The
removed MML command or GUI command is
displayed in the left pane. Then, click Apply.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
Page 26
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 26/254
No. Component
Parameter Description
Password Used to change the password.
1. Click Password. A Password dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter the old password in the Old Password text box
and the new password in the New Password and
Confirm Password text boxes.
3. Click OK . The password is changed.
About Displays the version information.
Lockup Locks the LMT window.
System
Settings
Used to set the automatic lockup time and specify the path
to save trace files.
1. Click System Settings. A System Settings dialog box
is displayed.
2. Enter the automatic lockup time and the path in the
Auto lock if no operation within (s) and Save path
text boxes, respectively.
3. Click Submit. The system setting is complete.
Logout Used to log out of the LMT.
4 Others Help Used to open online help files.
Layout Used to indicate the layout management function. Four window layouts are available: cascade, tile horizontal, tile
vertical, and dock window.
NOTE
l If the LMT detects a change in the base station application, you will be prompted with a message. If this
happens, log in to the LMT again.
l The LMT periodically checks whether the base station application has been changed. The time when you
are prompted with the message may be later than the time when the application was changed.
l In addition to MML commands and GUI commands, a customized command group includes virtualcommands. The virtual commands are applicable to the communication between the eCoordinator and
eNodeB.
l The Firefox browser does not support window layouts.
Online Help
The LMT provides two types of online help:
l LMT help
l MML help
Table 2-6 describes the online help of the LMT.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
Page 27
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 27/254
Table 2-6 Online help of the LMT
Name Description Startup Operation
LMT
help
Provides the following
information:
l LMT user guide
l Alarm details
l Event details
If you are using Internet Explorer:
l Press F1 or click Help in the LMT main window
to display LMT help topics.
l Click the mouse button in the displayed dialog
box, and press F1 to display the help information
about the dialog box.
If you are using a Firefox browser, click Help in the
LMT main window to display the help information.
MML
help
Provides the following
information about an
MML command:
l Function
l Precaution
l Parameters
l Example
l Output Description
Enter an MML command in the Command text box.
Press Enter or click Assist, and then click the Help
tab. The help information about the command is
displayed on the tab page.
2.7 LMT Offline Tools
LMT offline tools include the traffic recording review tool, offline MML tool, FTP client, and
HedEx Lite.
Table 2-7 lists application scenarios for different offline tools.
Table 2-7 Application scenarios for different offline tools
Tool Application Scenario
Traffic recording review tool Browses the tracing files in the .tmf format or monitoring
files in the .mmf format in offline mode.
Offline MML tool Displays the MML command help for a version in offline
or makes offline MML scripts.
HedEx Lite Browses the product documentation in the .hdx format.
FTP client Obtains the logs and data configuration files.
NOTE
If any of the preceding application scenarios is available, the four LMT offline tools will be automatically
installed.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
Page 28
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 28/254
2.7.1 Installing the LMT Offline Tool
This section describes how to install the local maintenance terminal (LMT) offline tool on the
LMT PC.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT as an administrator.
l A valid LMT software serial number has been obtained.
l The PC on which the LMT offline tool is to be installed meets the configuration
requirements.
Context
When the LMT offline tools of the current version have been installed:l If the LMT offline tools of a version later than the current version are required, install them
directly.
l If the LMT offline tools of a version earlier than the current version are required, uninstall
the tools of the current version, install the tools of a version earlier than the current version,
and reinstall the tools of the current version.
NOTE
The preceding operations are not involved in patch versions of the same R version.
Procedure
Step 1 Insert the installation CD-ROM for the LMT offline tool in the CD-ROM drive of the LMT PC.
l If the operating system can automatically operate the CD-ROM drive, the installation
program automatically starts.
l If the operating system cannot automatically operate the CD-ROM drive, open the folder in
the installation CD-ROM and double-click setup.bat or setup.vbs.
NOTE
You can obtain the installation program of the LMT offline tool from http://support.huawei.com. Log in to
http://support.huawei.com. Choose Software Center >Version Software >Wireless Product Line >Single
RAN > MBTS. Choose and download the installation program based on the software version.
Step 2 Select the installation program language and click OK .
The Install HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click Next.
The copyright declaration is displayed.
Step 4 Read the software permission terms. If you agree, choose I accept the terms and click Next.
The dialog box for you to specify the installation path is displayed.
Step 5 Use the default installation path or specify another installation path, and click Next.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
Page 29
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 29/254
NOTE
The default installation path is D:\HW LMT.
l If the LMT software of another version or for another NE has been installed, the default path is the installation
path of the installed LMT software and cannot be changed.
l If the installation path needs to be changed during this installation, LMT software of other products must
be uninstalled before beginning this installation.
Step 6 Select the required components and click Next. (You are advised to select all components.)
A CD KEY dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Enter the CD key and click Next.
An installation information confirmation dialog box is displayed.
Step 8 If the installation information is correct, click Next.
A dialog box showing the file copying progress is displayed.
After all files are copied, a dialog box showing the component initializing progress is displayed.
After all components are installed, a dialog box showing that the installation is complete is
displayed.
Step 9 Click Finish.
NOTE
After the LMT offline tool is installed, the system automatically starts the LMT service manager by default.
----End
2.7.2 Operations Related to LMT Offline MMLThis section describes how to use the browser to perform MML-related operations when you
have logged in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT) offline. (MML is short for man-machine
language.) You can view MML commands, prepare MML scripts, and obtain LMT online help.
Introduction to the Offline MML Server
This section describes the window of the LMT offline man-machine language (MML) server
and operations on the window of the server.
Startup Operation
To start the LMT offline MML server, choose Start > All Programs > Huawei Local
Maintenance Terminal > LMT Offline MML on the LMT PC.
Window of the LMT Offline MML Server
Figure 2-2 shows the window of the LMT offline MML server. Table 2-8 describes the
components in the window.
NOTE
If you have minimized the window of the LMT offline MML server, you can double-click at the lower rightcorner of the LMT PC to display the window again.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
Page 30
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 30/254
Figure 2-2 Window of the LMT offline MML server
Table 2-8 Components in the window of the LMT offline MML server
Component Description
Routine Displays the status of the LMT offline MML server.
NOTE
l To minimize the window of the LMT offline MML server, click
Hide.
l To start the LMT offline MML server, click Start.
l To stop the LMT offline MML server, click Stop.
l To log in to the LMT offline MML, click Open Browser.
Config Allows you to configure the server port.
About Displays information about the LMT offline MML server.
Introduction to the Offline MML Window
This section describes the offline man-machine language (MML) window.
Figure 2-3 shows the local maintenance terminal (LMT) offline MML window. Table 2-9
describes the components in the window.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
Page 31
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 31/254
Figure 2-3 LMT offline MML window
NOTE
l The MML navigation tree changes with the RAT, and the above window is specific to a multimode base
station.
l For details about MML commands and their related parameters, see the MML command help.
Table 2-9 Components in the LMT offline MML window
Component Description
Navigation Tree Lists all MML commands. If you double-click an MMLcommand in the navigation tree, the command will be displayed
in the command input text box.
Search Provides a way for you to search MML commands using the key
word.
Common Maintenance Displays the output of an MML command.
Operation Records Displays the information about all the commands that have been
executed.
NOTE
Issued On is the system time of the LMT PC.
Help Displays the help information about an MML command.
Pane for manual input of
an MML command
Displays the command and parameter values manually entered.
Command History Records all the commands entered by the user during one session.
Command Input Displays all the MML commands of the system. You can select
an MML command from the drop-down list or directly enter a
command.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
Page 32
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 32/254
Component Description
Area for settings
parameters of an MML
command
Displays all parameters that can be set in an MML command
entered in the Command Input text box.
NOTEA parameter in red is mandatory and a parameter in black is optional.
Help Provides the LMT online help.
About Provides version information about the LMT offline MML.
Logging In to and Logging Out of the Offline MML
This section describes how to log in to and log out of the local maintenance terminal (LMT)
offline man-machine language (MML).
Prerequisites
You have started the LMT offline MML server.
Procedure
l Log in to the LMT offline MML.
1. Choose a login method based on whether the LMT offline MML tool is installed on
the LMT PC. Table 2-10 lists the login methods.
Table 2-10 Methods for logging in to the LMT offline MML
If... Then...
The LMT offline MML tool is installed
on the LMT PC and has been started
In the address box of the browser, enter
http://127.0.0.1:Port or http://
IPAddress:Port. The login window is
displayed.
The LMT offline MML tool is not
installed on the LMT PC.
In the address box of the browser, enter
http://IPAddress:Port. The login
window is displayed.
NOTE
l IPAddress is the IP address of the PC on which the LMT offline MML tool is installed. Port
is the port number of the LMT offline MML server and the default value is 810.
l You can change the port number on the Config tab page of the window of the LMT offline MML
server. The change of the port number takes effect only after the LMT offline MML server is
restarted.
2. In the login window, specify OMType and Version, and click Login.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
Page 33
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 33/254
NOTE
Click Reset to restore the default settings.
l Log out of the LMT offline MML.
Click Logout at the upper right corner of the window of the LMT offline MML.
----End
Preparing Offline MML Scripts
This section describes how to prepare offline man-machine language (MML) scripts.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT offline MML.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT offline MML window, enter an MML command in the Command Input text box
and click Assist to set related parameters.
NOTE
When entering an MML command in the Command Input text box, you can select the command from the drop-
down list.
Step 2 Click Save to save the entered MML command.
NOTE
l When you save an MML command, the command does not overwrite a previously saved command.
l On the Operation Record tab page, you can right-click a command and choose an option from the shortcut
menu to clear or save the selected or all records.
----End
2.7.3 Traffic Recording Review Tool
This section describes how to use the traffic recording review tool, a component of the local
maintenance terminal (LMT) offline tool, to review tracing and monitoring data.
l Startup Operation
On the LMT PC, choose Start > All Programs > Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal >Traffic Recording Review Tool.
l Window of the traffic recording review tool
Figure 2-4 shows the window of the traffic recording review tool. Table 2-11 describes the
components in the window.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
Page 34
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 34/254
Figure 2-4 Window of the traffic recording review tool
Table 2-11 Components in the window of the traffic recording review tool
No. Component Description
1 Menu bar Provides the system menu.
2 Toolbar Provides shortcut icons.
3 Traffic recording review area Displays data of a tracing or
monitoring task.
2.7.4 FTP Client
The FTP client is a component of the LMT offline suite and enables the LMT to communicate
with the FTP server according to the FTP or FTPs protocol. You can obtain logs and upload data
configuration files through the FTP client.
Startup
Choose Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > FTP Client on
the LMT PC.
Interface
Figure 2-5 shows the FTP client interface.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
Page 35
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 35/254
Figure 2-5 FTP client interface
Table 2-12 describes the components of the FTP client interface.
Table 2-12 Components of FTP client interface
Number Component Description
1 Menu bar Provides the menus for the operation of the system.
2 Tool bar Provides the shortcut icons for the operation of the
system.
3 Server input area Includes the server name, user name, user password,
port number, and mode in this area.
NOTE
To query the port number, run the LST FTPSSRV
command to query the setting for the Command Port of
FTPS Server. If an incorrect port number is used, the LMT
cannot be connected to the FTP server.
4 Local directory list
window
Displays the directory structure of the current
computer.
5 Server file list window Lists the files and file folders stored in the connected
FTP server.
6 Local file list window Lists the files and file folders stored in the current
computer.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
Page 36
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 36/254
Number Component Description
7 Prompt information
window
Displays the information such as the connection
status of the FTP server and the operation
descriptions.
2.8 Configuring an Emergency OM Channel
For a separate-MPT multimode base station, an emergency OM channel is used to maintain a
faulty base station through the OM channel of a normal base station. The maintenance includes
proxy PNP tracing and operations using MML commands for the faulty base station through the
emergency OM channel of the normal base station.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the operator has agreed to the solution of maintaining the target base station using
a proxy base station and that this maintenance mode does not have security risks.
Context
l In this document, the target base station refers to the faulty base station and the proxy base
station refers to the normal base station.
l Ensure that the proxy base station connects to the target base station.
lEnsure that the emergency OM channel can be established only between one proxy basestation and one target base station.
l If the proxy base station or target base station is reset after the emergency OM channel
between them is successfully established, the emergency OM channel needs to be re-
established 5 minutes after the reset. Otherwise, the emergency OM channel cannot be re-
established.
l This maintenance mode does not apply to GBTS.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Config Emergent OM Channel on the menu bar of the LMT.
The Config Emergent OM Channel dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Set related parameters in the Config Emergent OM Channel dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 2-13.
Table 2-13 Parameters related to the emergency OM channel configuration
Parameter Description
Quantity of BBU
Subrack
This parameter can be set to Single Subrack , or Multi-Subrack .
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
Page 37
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 37/254
Parameter Description
Main Control
Board Subrack
No.
Indicates the subrack number of the main control board of the target base
station. This parameter is valid only when Quantity of BBU Subrack is
set to Multi-Subrack .
Main Control
Board Slot No.
Indicates the slot number of the main control board of the target base
station.
User Name Indicates the user name used for logging in to the LMT of the target base
station.
Password Indicates the password used for logging in to the LMT of the target base
station.
CTRLLNK
Parent Node Slot
No.
Indicates the slot number of the parent node if the proxy base station and
target base station are interconnected. This parameter is valid only when
Quantity of BBU Subrack is set to Multi-Subrack .
CTRLLNK
Parent Node Port
No.
Indicates the slot number of the parent port if the proxy base station and
target base station are interconnected. This parameter is valid only when
Quantity of BBU Subrack is set to Multi-Subrack .
Step 3 Click Connect to establish an emergency OM channel between the proxy base station and the
target base station.
Step 4 Click DisConnet to disconnect the emergency OM channel of the proxy base station from that
of the target base station.
----End
2.9 Obtain Documentation List
This section describes how to query and obtain documentation packages of the corresponding
product version.
Startup
Click Obtain Documentation List on the menu bar of the LMT to start this function.
GUI
l Library Name: Name of the document package of the current product version.
l Product Version: Current product version number.
l Library Version: Version number of the document package of the current product version.
l Available at support.huawei.com: Yes indicates that the document package is released
globally at http://support.huawei.com, and you can obtain it. No indicates that the document
package is not released globally at http://support.huawei.com, and you need to contact
Huawei engineers to obtain it.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
Page 38
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 38/254
Function
You can use either of the following methods to download the documentation packages:
l Search for the documentation packages at the website http://support.huawei.com and then
download them.
l Click Export to export the corresponding .hdxi file. Then double-click the .hdxi file to
search for related product documentation on http://support.huawei.com. The result will be
listed for downloading.
NOTE
Before using this function, ensure that:
l You can visit http://support.huawei.com and have obtained the account.
l (For initial use only) You have downloaded the HedEx Lite from the homepage of http://
support.huawei.com to your PC and started it.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
Page 39
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 39/254
3 Getting Started with the LMT
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to manage local maintenance terminal (LMT) rights and how to log
in to and exit the LMT. A minimum of 1 GB free space is required to ensure that the LMT runs
correctly.
3.1 Logging In to and Exiting the LMT
You can log in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT) to manage the base station locally. After
the operation and maintenance (OM) channel between the base station and the U2000 server is
established, you can also use the U2000 client to log in to the base station.
3.2 Managing Rights
Managing rights involves managing login accounts, user passwords, and command groups.
3.3 Setting Office Information on the LMT
This section describes how to set IP address information for using the LMT to log in to the U2000
or base station.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
Page 40
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 40/254
3.1 Logging In to and Exiting the LMT
You can log in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT) to manage the base station locally. After
the operation and maintenance (OM) channel between the base station and the U2000 server is
established, you can also use the U2000 client to log in to the base station.
Prerequisites
Before using the LMT, install the JAVA Platform Standard Edition Runtime Environment (JRE)
plug-in of jre-6u26-windows-i586 or a later version on the computer where the LMT is installed.
The JRE plug-in is a standard Java runtime environment plug-in, which can be downloaded from
http://java.com/.
l If the plug-in is not installed on the computer, the system displays the message No Java
plug-in found or not the required at least version 1.6.0.26, part functions will bedisabled after login. Please click "Download Java Plugin" to install, and open your
browser again.
l If the installed plug-in is not the latest version, uninstall the existing version before
installing the latest version.
– If the plug-in of version 1.6 is installed, the system displays the message The
recommended version of the Java plug-in is 1.6.0.26, but the installed version is
x.x.x.xx now, please click "Download Java Plugin" to install, and open your
browser again.
– If the plug-in of version 1.7 is installed, the system displays the message You cannot
use Web LMT,because the installed Java version is x.x.x.xx, it may be incompatible
with WebLMT. Please install Java plug-in 1.7.0.45 or later version.
NOTE
x.x.x.xx indicates the version of the installed JRE plug-in.
l If you cannot log in to the LMT after the plug-in is upgraded to the latest version, restart
the browser and then log in.
Context
LMT users are categorized into local users and element management system (EMS) users. For
details, see 3.2.1 Concepts Related to Rights Management.
A maximum of six local users and EMS users can log in to the LMT at the same time.
The LMT can be accessed using the default HTTPS policy. If HTTP is entered in a web browser,
the HTTP is automatically changed into HTTPS before logging in to the LMT.
If the colors cannot be displayed in the main window of the LMT, choose Tools > Internet
Options from the Internet Explorer menu bar. On the General tab page, click Accessibility.
Then, clear the Ignore colors specified on Web pages check box in the Formatting area.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
Page 41
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 41/254
CAUTION
When the LMT is running, do not change the system time or time zone of an LMT PC. Otherwise,
a critical fault may occur in the system. If the system time or time zone has to be changed, perform the operation after the LMT exits.
NOTICE
l When the LMT uses the Firefox browser and Block pop-up windows is selected, you will
fail to log in to the LMT. To avoid this problem, open a web page using the Firefox browser.
On the web page, choose Tools > Options from the menu bar. On the Options window,
under Content, clear Block pop-up windows check box.
l The refresh function of the browser cannot be used on the LMT. If you use the refresh
function in the LMT main window, the LMT is logged out. If you use the refresh function
on the monitor window, an error occurs in the script.
l When the LMT is used in Internet Explorer, do not change the properties of the cache file
folder. Otherwise, Internet Explorer is automatically refreshed, and therefore, an error
occurs in the LMT main window.
l If you choose Start > Run to start File Transfer Protocol (FTP) services, the LMT main
window is replaced with the login dialog box of the FTP server. To avoid this problem,
choose Tools > Internet Options from the Internet Explorer menu bar. On the
Advanced tab page, under Browse, clear the Reuse windows for launching shortcuts
check box.l Before you use the LMT to upgrade or roll back a base station, clear the browser's buffer
and cookies.
l If you press ALT+<---, the LMT main window may experience an error. In this case, press
ALT+---> to restore the window settings. If the window settings cannot be restored, close
the browser and log in to the LMT again.
l The default policy to log in to the LMT can be set by running the SET
WEBLOGINPOLICY command. At present, you can use one of the following three
policies to log in to the LMT. (1) Compatible policy: Either HTTP or HTTPS can be used
to log in to the LMT. (2) HTTPS only: Only HTTPS can be used to log in to the LMT. (3)
Redirection between HTTP and HTTPS: When HTTP is used to log in to the LMT, HTTP
is changed to HTTPS before login, then HTTPS returns to HTTP after login.
l The password status will be checking when you log in to the LMT. You can set whether
the LMT to force the user to change the password on first login by running the SET
PWDPOLICY command.
Procedure
l To use the LMT to log in to the base station, perform the following steps:
1. Connect the LMT to the base station.
The network port on the PC where the LMT application is installed can connect to the
WMPT or LMPT board in the BBU3900 through a crossover cable or straight-through
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
Page 42
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 42/254
cable and can connect to the UMPT board in the BBU3900 through a USB-to-Ethernet
adaption cable, as shown in Table 3-1 and Figure 3-1.
Table 3-1 Cable connections
Cable Port
Crossover cable/
Straight-through cable
ETH port on the LMPT or WMPT
USB-Ethernet adaption
cable
USB port on the UMPT
Figure 3-1 Connection between the computer where the LMT is installed and the
BBU3900
(1) BBU3900 (2) Crossover cable, Straight-
through cable, or USB-to-
Ethernet adaption cable
(3) Computer where the LMT is
installed
2. In the address box of the browser, enter the IP address of the main control board for
local maintenance. The default IP address is 192.168.0.49.
NOTE
l If the main control board UMPT is upgraded from V200R014C00 or an earlier version to
V200R015C00 or an later version, use the default local maintenance IP address 17.21.2.15.
l If the main control board UMPT is newly delivered and the software version is
V200R015C00 or an later version, use the default local maintenance IP address
192.168.0.49.
3. Click Go. The Local Maintenance Terminal login window is displayed, as shown
in Figure 3-2.
After the LMT application software is successfully installed, you can log in to the
LMT using either of the following methods. Figure 3-3 shows the LMT login window.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
Page 43
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 43/254
– Choose Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal >
Local Maintenance Terminal. The Local Maintenance Terminal window is
displayed.
– In the address box of the browser, enter the IP address https://127.0.0.1:820. The
Local Maintenance Terminal window is displayed.
NOTE
The service port number is 820 by default. If the service port of the local WebLMT is
changed, the entered port number must be consistent with the changed service port.
Figure 3-2 Local Maintenance Terminal login window
NOTE
l During login, the system checks the Java version and compatibility view settings of the browser.
To use the optimum LMT configurations, perform the operations as prompted.
l In the login window, you can download the default Huawei CA certificate, including the LMT
predefined certificate and the predefined certificate of the U2000 proxy server. If the predefined
certificates have been replaced, the CA certificate downloaded in the login window is invalid.
In this case, import the CA certificate matching the new predefined certificates.
4. Enter the user name, password, and verification code in the User name, Password,
and Verification code text boxes, respectively. Set User type to Local.
NOTE
l User name and Password are used to log in to the WebLMT of the base station.
l User name is admin by default. The value of Password varies depending on scenarios:
l For newly delivered base stations of SRAN8.0 or later, the default value of Password ishwbs@com (case-sensitive).
l For base stations that are upgraded from SRAN7.0 or an earlier version to the current version,
the password needs to be the same as that used before the upgrade (case-sensitive).
l Change the password after you have logged in to the LMT. For details, see Changing the
password of a current user account.
l If the verification code is illegible, click Refresh to change the verification code.
5. Click Login. The LMT main window is displayed.
NOTE
If the login fails because the provided information is incorrect, click Reset and enter the correct
information. If the login failure persists, check the connection between the LMT and the main control board.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
Page 44
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 44/254
l To use the U2000 client to log in to the base station, perform the following steps:
1. Set proxy server.
If the LMT is used in Internet Explorer, perform the following steps before entering
the IP address:
a. Choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar. The Internet Options
dialog box is displayed. On the Connections tab page, click LAN Settings. In
the displayed LAN Settings dialog box, select Use a proxy server for your
LAN in the Proxy server area, set the Address and Port Number of the U2000
client.
b. Choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar. The Internet Options
dialog box is displayed. On the Advanced tab page, select Use HTTP1.1
through proxy connections under HTTP 1.1 settings.
2. Enter the OM IP address of the main control board in the address box of the browser,
enter the user name and password in the User name and Password text boxes, andthen press Enter key. The Local Maintenance Terminal login window is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-2.
3. Enter the user name, password, and verification code in the User name, Password,
and Verification code text boxes, respectively. Set User type to EMS.
NOTE
l EMS user names and passwords are authorized by the U2000 server.
l If the verification code is illegible, click Refresh to change the verification code.
l If port 8080 or 8081 is used by the U2000 agent, you need to enter the user name and password
of the agent server when performing the tasks of logging in to the web LMT, tracing, monitoring,
batch processing, and device maintenance. The default user name is proxyuser and the default password is Changeme_123.
4. Click Login. The LMT main window is displayed.
NOTE
If the login fails because the provided information is incorrect, click Reset and enter the correct
information. If the login failure persists, check the connection between the LMT and the main control
board.
l Exit the LMT.
1. Click Logout in the toolbar in the LMT main window. The Confirm dialog box is
displayed.
2. Click Yes. The LMT is disconnected from the base station. A dialog box for logging
in to the LMT is displayed.
3. Close the browser to exit the LMT.
----End
3.2 Managing Rights
Managing rights involves managing login accounts, user passwords, and command groups.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
Page 45
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 45/254
3.2.1 Concepts Related to Rights Management
This section describes rights control principles, command groups, user types, user rights, login
passwords, and operation time limits.
Table 3-2 describes the concepts related to rights management.
Table 3-2 Concepts related to rights management
Name Description
Principles for rights
control
The local maintenance terminal (LMT) operation and maintenance
(OM) subsystem enables multiple users to perform operations at the
same time. To ensure system security, user rights are controlled in
the following aspects:
l User identity: A user must enter the correct user name and
password when logging in to the LMT.l User rights: Users of different levels are allowed to use different
graphical user interface (GUI) operations and man-machine
language (MML) operations.
l Operation time limit: It specifies the time during which a user can
perform operations.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
Page 46
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 46/254
Name Description
Command groups The NE provides 32 command groups G_0 to G_31 Command
groups G_22 to G_31 are reserved. The command groups are
described as follows:l G_0: Basic command.
This command group contains all the basic commands.
l G_1: System command.
This command group contains commands for managing NMS
interfaces and other common services.
l G_2: Alarm query.
This command group contains commands for querying alarms
and faults that cause the alarms.
l G_3: Alarm management.
This command group contains commands for masking alarms
(faults), controlling alarm indicators, clearing alarms, enabling
correlation, checking synchronization, and customizing alarm
environment, as well as commands for configuring and
maintaining alarms.
l G_4: Performance query.
This command group contains commands for querying
performance task files, description files, measurement objects,
and measurement result files.
l G_5: Performance management.
This command group contains commands for download/
uploading performance task files, uploading measurementdescription files, adding/deleting measurement objects,
uploading/deleting measurement result object, verifying
services, and other maintenance management commands.
l G_6: Device query.
This command group contains commands for querying
configuration parameters and status for slots/subracks/cabinets,
boards, BBUs, , and commands for querying the NE status and
configuration parameters for NE names and other NE basic
information.
l G_7: Device management.
This command group contains commands for managingconfiguration parameters for slots/subracks/cabinets, boards,
BBUs, , and maintaining the status of such equipment, and
commands for managing NE names and other NE configuration
parameters and maintaining the NE status.
l G_8: Trace query.
This command group contains commands for querying tracing
tasks.
l G_9: Trace management.
This command group contains commands for managing tracing
tasks, for example, creating, deleting, starting, stopping, and
querying tracing tasks, and uploading tracing result files.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
Page 47
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 47/254
Name Description
l G_10: Wireless query.
This command group contains commands for querying parameter
configurations for radio resources, cells, and neighboring cells,and commands for querying their status.
l G_11: Wireless management.
This command group contains commands for configuring radio
resources, cells, and neighboring cells, and commands for
maintaining their status.
l G_12: Transport query.
This command group contains commands for querying
parameters related to IP and ATM transmission and querying the
transmission status.
l G_13: Transport management.
This command group contains commands for configuring parameters related to IP and ATM transmission and maintaining
the transmission status.
l G_14: Security query.
This command group contains commands for querying
parameters and status of the security management functions.
l G_15: Security management.
This command group contains commands for configuring
parameters and status of the security management functions and
maintaining the status.
lG_16: Time query.This command group contains commands for querying clock and
clock reference sources.
l G_17: Time management.
This command group contains commands for configuring clock
and clock reference sources and maintaining their status.
l G_18: Software query.
This command group contains commands for querying the
transmission of files, such as license files, version files, patch
files, and FTP files.
l G_19: Software management.
This command group contains commands for configuring
software management functions for transmission of files, such as
license files, version files, patch files, and FTP files, and
maintaining the software management functions.
l G_20: Test query.
This command group contains commands for querying debugs,
tests, and exceptions.
l G_21: Test management.
This command group contains commands for managing the
debugs, tests, and exceptions.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
Page 48
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 48/254
Name Description
User type LMT users are categorized into local users and element management
system (EMS) users, which are described as follows:
l Local user: Account of local user (including the default adminuser) is managed by the LMT. Local user can use the LMT to log
in to the base station when he is disconnected from the U2000
server.
l EMS users: Accounts of EMS users are centrally managed by the
U2000 server. EMS user accounts are created, modified,
authenticated, and authorized by the U2000 server. Only
authorized EMS users are permitted to use the LMT to log in to
the base station. Authorized EMS users can also log in to the
U2000 server from the U2000 client to manage the base station.
To directly log in to the base station as an EMS user, ensure that
the base station is connected to the U2000 server.
User rights LMT user accounts are classified into internal user accounts and
external user accounts. Different accounts have different rights,
which are described as follows:
l The internal user account includes a super user account. The super
user name is admin and the default password is hwbs@com. A
super user has all rights.
l Five levels of external user accounts are provided, and each level
is allocated different rights. The external user accounts are
described as follows:
–GUEST: Users with GUEST-level accounts are only allowedto view data. They can use command groups G_0, G_2, G_4,
G_6, G_8, G_10, G_12, G_16, G_18, and G_20.
– USER: Users with USER-level accounts have the rights of
users with GUEST-level accounts and are also allowed to
operate and maintain the system. They can use any command
groups other than G_1, G_14, or G_15.
– OPERATOR: Users with OPERATOR-level accounts have
the rights of users with USER-level accounts and are also
allowed to configure data. They can use any command groups
other than G_1, G_14, or G_15.
– ADMINISTRATOR: Users with ADMINISTRATOR-level
accounts have all rights and can use all command groups.
– CUSTOM: Users with CUSTOM-level accounts can be
allocated any command groups when the accounts are created.
The rights can be changed. Users with different CUSTOM-
level accounts have different rights.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
Page 49
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 49/254
Name Description
Login password
Login password involves the password policies, initial password, and
password change permissions, which are described as follows:
l Each user account is allocated a login password to ensure systemsecurity. A user must enter the correct user name and password
when logging in to the LMT. The user can operate the base station
only after being verified.
l The login password of admin user is set when the base station
application software is installed. The admin user, user with the
ADMINISTRATOR-level account, and authorized users with
CUSTOM-level accounts are allowed to set the login password
of an external user account when creating the account.
l All users can change their own passwords. The admin user, user
with the ADMINISTRATOR-level account, and authorized users
with CUSTOM-level accounts are allowed to change the login password of any external user account. Only the admin user is
allowed to change the admin login password.
Operation time limit
The definition, principle, and settings of the operation time limit are
described as follows:
l The operation time limit specifies the time during which a user
can perform operations. The admin user has no operation time
limit, that is, the admin user can perform operations anytime. The
operation time limit for an external user account is specified when
the account is created. If no time limit is set, the user can perform
operations anytime.l The operation time limit is represented by a combination of the
date, day, and time.
l Only the admin user, user with the ADMINISTRATOR-level
account, and authorized users with CUSTOM-level accounts are
allowed to set or change the operation time limit for an external
user account.
3.2.2 Managing User AccountsManaging user accounts involves creating, modifying, and removing external user accounts.
Table 3-3 describes the tasks involved in managing user accounts.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
Page 50
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 50/254
Table 3-3 Tasks involved in managing user accounts
Task Description
Creating an external
user account
Functi
on
Creates an external user account and sets the login password,
user level, command group (for users with the CUSTOMaccount only), and operation time limit for the new user
account. Only the admin user, user with the
ADMINISTRATOR account, and authorized users with the
CUSTOM account are allowed to create an external user
account.
Proced
ure
Run the ADD OP command to create an external user
account.
Modifying an
external user
account
Functi
on
Modifies the attributes of an external user account,
including the login password, user level, user rights, and
operation time limit. The new password takes effect uponthe next login. Modifications of other attributes take effect
immediately. Only the admin user, user with the
ADMINISTRATOR account, and authorized users with the
CUSTOM account are allowed to modify the attributes of
an external user account.
Proced
ure
Run the MOD OP command to modify the attributes of an
external user account.
Removing an
external user
account
Functi
on
Removes an external user account. Only the admin user,
user with the ADMINISTRATOR account, and authorized
users with the CUSTOM account are allowed to remove anexternal user account.
Proced
ure
Run the RMV OP command to remove an external user
account.
NOTE
l New user accounts must be different from existing user accounts.
l The admin user is internal accounts and cannot be removed.
3.2.3 Managing Login Passwords
Managing login passwords involves setting and viewing password policies and changing the
passwords of current and external user accounts.
Table 3-4 describes the tasks involved in managing login passwords.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
Page 51
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 51/254
Table 3-4 Tasks involved in managing login passwords
Task Description
Setting
password policies
Function Password policies define how to set login passwords.
NOTE
l Password policies define the minimum password length and
complexity. If a password does not meet the required minimum
password length or complexity, this password cannot take effect.
l Password policies define the maximum number of times an
incorrect password can be entered. The default number of
attempts is three. If this threshold is exceeded, the LMT will be
locked and then unlocked 30 minutes later. You can specify the
length of this duration in the password policies.
l Only users with the ADMINISTRATOR account are authorized
to set login passwords.
Procedure Run the SET PWDPOLICY command to set login password policies.
Viewing
password
policies
FunctionUsers can view password policies before setting correct login
passwords.
ProcedureRun the LST PWDPOLICY command to view password
policies.
Changing the
password of a
current user
account
FunctionThe current user can change its own password after login.
The new password takes effect upon the next login.
Procedure
1. Click Password on the upper right side of the toolbar in
the LMT main window. A Password dialog box isdisplayed.
2. Fill in the Old Password, New Password, and Confirm
Password text boxes, and click OK .
NOTE
Think carefully before you change a domain account's password.
After this change, all users that have logged in to U2000 clients using
this account will be forcibly logged out.
Changing the
password of anexternal user
account
Function
Only the admin user, users with the ADMINISTRATOR
account, and authorized users with the CUSTOM account
are allowed to modify password options to change the
password of an external user account.
ProcedureRun the MOD OP command to change the password of an
external user account.
NOTE
Be cautious when changing the password of the admin user. If you forget the password, you cannot log in.
In this case, contact Huawei technical support.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
Page 52
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 52/254
3.2.4 Managing Command Groups
Managing a command group involves viewing and naming a command group and changing the
commands in a command group.
Table 3-5 describes the tasks involved in managing command groups.
Table 3-5 Tasks involved in managing command groups
Task Description
Viewing a command
group
Function The base station provides 32 command groups G_0
to G_31. Command groups G_22 to G_31 are
reserved. Only the admin user, user with the
ADMINISTRATOR account, and authorized users
with the CUSTOM account are allowed to view
command groups.
Procedure Run the LST CCG command.
Naming a command
group
Function Only the admin user, user with the
ADMINISTRATOR account, and authorized users
with the CUSTOM account are allowed to name a
command group.
Procedure l Run the LST CCGN command to view the name
of a command group.
l Run the SET CCGN command to name a
command group.
Changing the commands
in a command group
Function Only the admin user, user with the
ADMINISTRATOR account, and authorized users
with the CUSTOM account are allowed to change
the commands in a command group.
Procedure l Run the ADD CCG command to add commands
to a command group.
l Run the RMV CCG command to remove
commands from a command group.
3.3 Setting Office Information on the LMTThis section describes how to set IP address information for using the LMT to log in to the U2000
or base station.
Context
This setting is required if the LMT application software is installed on the PC.
Generally, an office uses a name to differentiate IP addresses of the U2000 or base stations to
be logged in to. The office information can be set on the LMT so that the LMT can connect to
different U2000 or base stations.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
Page 53
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 53/254
Procedure
Step 1 Figure 3-3 shows the LMT login window. Click … to the right of the Office text box.
An Office Management dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3-3 Local Maintenance Terminal login window
Step 2 In the Office Management dialog box shown in Figure 3-4, set related parameters. For details
about parameter descriptions, see Table 3-6.
Figure 3-4 Office Management dialog box
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
Page 54
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 54/254
Table 3-6 Descriptions of parameters in the Office Management dialog box
Parameter Description
Office Indicates the name of the NE connected to the
LMT. The name is user-defined and consistsof a maximum of 80 single-byte characters.
IP Address Indicates the IP address of the NE.
NOTE
l If the main control board WMPT is upgraded
from V200R014C00 or an earlier version to
V200R015C00 or an later version, use the
default local maintenance IP address
17.21.2.15.
l If the main control board WMPT is newly
delivered and the software version is
V200R015C00 or an later version, use thedefault local maintenance IP address
192.168.0.49.
Connect Type Indicates the mode of connection between the
LMT and the NE. The LMT and the NE can
be connected in common or SSL mode.
Proxy Server Indicates the proxy server through which the
LMT connects to the NE. The IP address of
the proxy server can be specified.
Protocol Version Indicates the version of the Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL) protocol. This parameter is set if the SSL connection mode is used.
Add If you click this button, an ADD dialog box
is displayed for you to add office information
about another U2000 or base station.
Modify If you click this button after choosing an
office, you can modify information about this
office.
Delete If you click this button after choosing an
office, you can delete information about thisoffice.
Step 3 Click Add.
An Add dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set related parameters in the Add dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions, seeTable
3-7.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
Page 55
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 55/254
Table 3-7 Descriptions parameters in the Add dialog box
Parameter Description
Office You can define a name for the NE to be
visited.
IP Address Indicates the IP address of the NE to be
visited.
Connect Type Indicates the mode of connection between the
LMT and the NE. This parameter can be set
to NORMAL or SSL.
Proxy Server If the U2000 is used as the proxy server, set
this parameter to the IP address of the U2000.
SSL Setting-Protocol Version Indicates the protocol type and version if the
SSL connection mode is used. This parameter
can be set to SSLv3, TSLv1, TSLv1.1, or
TSLv1.2.
NOTE
The SSL connection mode is recommended to ensure secure communication between the LMT and base station.
Step 5 Click Submit.
The Office Management dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click Close. The settings are complete.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 3 Getting Started with the LMT
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
Page 56
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 56/254
4 Running MML Commands
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to run man-machine language (MML) commands on the local
maintenance terminal (LMT) to operate and maintain a base station.
4.1 Basic Concepts Related to MML Commands
The basic concepts related to man-machine language (MML) commands consist of MML
commands and the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of MML commands.
4.2 Running a Single MML Command
You can run man-machine language (MML) commands one at a time to perform routineoperation and maintenance.
4.3 Running MML Commands in Batches
This section describes how to run MML commands in batches to perform a function or operation.
4.4 Checking the Syntax
The syntax checking function enables you to check the syntax of man-machine language (MML)
commands before you run the commands in batches. This function improves the maintenance
efficiency.
4.5 Setting Parameters
You can set parameters in the MML Settings dialog box.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
Page 57
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 57/254
4.1 Basic Concepts Related to MML Commands
The basic concepts related to man-machine language (MML) commands consist of MML
commands and the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of MML commands.
4.1.1 Introduction to MML Commands
This section describes the functions, formats, and types of operations performed using man-
machine language (MML) commands.
Functions of MML Commands
You can use MML commands to operate and maintain the base station. Some MML commands
can be used for all radio access technologies (RATs), and some MML commands are specificto a particular RAT. MML commands enable you to perform the following operations:
l System management
l Equipment management
l Alarm management
l Carrier resource management
l Transmission management
Formats of MML Commands
The format of an MML command can be "Command Word: Parameter Name=Value;".
The command word is mandatory, whereas the parameter name and value are optional. Examples
of MML commands are as follows:
l An MML command with a command word and parameters: SET ALMSHLD:
AID=25600, SHLDFLG=UNSHIELDED;
l An MML command with only a command word: LST VER:;
NOTE
The value of a string or password parameter must not contain +++ (start characters of an MML message),
---END (end characters of an MML message), or the following characters: < > ! ? \ / ; , = + % * " ' |
Types of Operations Performed Using MML Commands
The MML command word format is denoted as Action + Object. Table 4-1 describes the most
commonly used MML commands.
Table 4-1 Most commonly used MML commands
Action Meaning
ACT Activate
ADD Add
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
Page 58
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 58/254
Action Meaning
BKP Backup
BLK Block
DLD Download
DSP Display (used for dynamic information)
LST List (used for static information)
MOD Modify
RMV Remove
RST Reset
SET Set
STP Stop or close
STR Start or open
UBL Unblock
ULD Upload
SCN Scan
CLB Calibrate
4.1.2 Components of the MML Command Window
This section describes the components of the man-machine language (MML) command window.
In the LMT main window, click the MML tab. Figure 4-1 shows the MML command window.
Figure 4-1 MML command window
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
Page 59
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 59/254
Table 4-2 describes the components of the MML command window.
Table 4-2 Components of the MML command window
No. Field Description
1 Radio access technology (RAT)
selection area
You can choose Common or a specific RAT.
2 Common Maintenance tab Displays the output of an MML command.
3 Operation Record tab Displays information about all the commands that
have been executed by the user.
4 Help tab Displays the help topics for an MML command.
5 Command output handling
options
You can click Save Result, Auto Scroll, or Clear
All.
6 Pane for manual input of an
MML command
Displays the manually entered command and
parameter values.
7 Command History text box Records all the commands and parameters a user
enters during one session.
8 Command text box Displays all the MML commands of the system.
You can select an MML command from the drop-
down list or enter the command directly.
Select Use MML By Proxy. You can log in to the
target base station using the emergency OM
channel on the proxy base station and then execute
related MML commands to maintain the target
base station.
NOTICE
Before Use MML By Proxy is enabled, ensure that the
emergency OM channel has been established. For
configurations of an emergency OM channel, see 2.8
Configuring an Emergency OM Channel.
9 Area for settings parameters of
an MML command
Displays all parameters that can be set in an MML
command entered in the Command text box. The
parameters in red are mandatory, for example,
Cabinet No. in Figure 4-1. The parameters in
black are optional, for example, Subrack No. in
Figure 4-1.
NOTE
l The MML navigation tree changes with the RAT selected.
l For details about MML commands and their related parameters, see the MML command help.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
Page 60
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 60/254
4.2 Running a Single MML Command
You can run man-machine language (MML) commands one at a time to perform routine
operation and maintenance.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT).
Context
You can use one of the following four methods to run a single MML command:
l Enter an MML command in the Command text box.
lSelect an MML command from the Command History drop-down list box.
l Choose an MML command in the MML Commands navigation tree.
l To manually input an MML command, enter or copy it into the pane for manual input of
commands.
Procedure
l Enter an MML command in the Command text box.
1. Enter an MML command in theCommand text box. When typing an MML command,
you can select the command from the drop-down list.
2. Press Enter or click Assist. The parameters related to the command are displayed in
the area for setting the parameters of the command.
3. Set the related parameters.
4. Press F9 or click Exec to run the command. The MML command output is displayed
on the Common Maintenance tab page.
l Select an MML command from the Command History drop-down list box.
1. Select a historical command from the Command History drop-down list box. Press
F7 or click to select the previous command, and press F8 or click to
select the next command. The parameters related to the command are displayed in the
area for setting the parameters of the command.
2. Set the related parameters.
3. Press F9 or click Exec to run the command. The MML command output is displayed
on the Common Maintenance tab page.
l Choose an MML command in the MML Commands navigation tree.
1. Choose and double-click an MML command in the MML Commands navigation
tree.
2. Set the related parameters.
3. Press F9 or click Exec to run the command. The MML command output is displayed
on the Common Maintenance tab page.
l To manually input an MML command, enter or copy it into the pane for manual input of
commands.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
Page 61
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 61/254
1. Manually enter or copy an MML command with complete parameter settings into the
pane.
2. Press F9 or click Exec to run the command. The MML command output is displayed
on the Common Maintenance tab page.
NOTE
l The parameters in red are mandatory, and those in black are optional.
l To obtain information about a parameter, move the cursor to the input box of the parameter.
l When you run an MML command with a time parameter, note that the default value of the time
parameter is the base station time. If required, you can change the value.
l If an MML command fails to be executed, the execution result is displayed in red on theCommon
Maintenance tab page.
l Setting the browser scaling to 100% is recommended.
----End
4.3 Running MML Commands in Batches
This section describes how to run MML commands in batches to perform a function or operation.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The batch file is ready.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) of the specified version has been installed. If the plug-
in of version 1.6 is installed, the recommended version is 1.6.0.26. If the plug-in of version
1.7 is installed, the recommended version is 1.7.0.45.
Context
The batch file (also called data script file) is a text file. It contains a group of man-machine
language (MML) command scripts for a special task. The system automatically runs the MML
command scripts in sequence.
NOTE
The batch processing window is fixed in size and does not change with the web page.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Batch.
Step 2 Copy a group of command scripts with complete parameter values from the batch file to the
pane for entering MML commands, or manually enter a group of MML commands, or click
Open... to select an MML command batch processing file.
NOTE
l Click Open... to select a file whose size is not greater than 4 MB.
l After you click New, a window is displayed indicating whether to save the content in the pane for
entering MML commands.
l You can click Save to save the content in the pane for entering MML commands to a text file.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
Page 62
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 62/254
Step 3 Click Customize. In the displayed Customize dialog box, specify related parameters for batch
processing.
NOTE
l Command send interval(s): specifies the interval at which two MML commands are executed.
l Save Failed Commands: specifies a text file for saving MML commands that fail to be executed.
l Save Results: specifies a text file for saving the successful or failed MML command execution results.
Step 4 Choose an execution type in the Execution Type area. Table 4-3 lists the execution types.
Table 4-3 Execution types
Execution Type Description
All The system automatically runs all MML commands one by one.
Step by Step The system runs one MML command each time you click Go.
Breakpoint In this mode, you need to click a command before which the command
execution needs to be stopped. Click Go. The system runs the MML
commands from the first one to the one before the specified command.
When you click Go again, the system runs the MML commands from
the specified command to the last command or another command
before which the command execution needs to be stopped.
Range The system runs MML commands within a specified range.
Prompt when
error occurs
l Check box selected: If an MML command is delivered to the NE
but no response is returned or the return code for the MML
command is not zero, a dialog box is displayed and the MMLcommand execution stops.
l Check box deselected: If an MML command is delivered to the NE
but no response is returned or the return code for the MML
command is not zero, the MML command execution continues until
the operation completes and the command is marked with .
NOTE
l If the return code for an MML command is 0, the MML command is
successfully executed. If the return code for an MML command is not zero,
the MML command fails to be executed.
l Execution of some MML commands takes a long time. After an MML
command is delivered to the NE, the NE directly returns a code zero. It doesnot means the command has been successfully executed, and it indicates
that the NE receives the MML commands and starts the execution.
Step 5 Click Go. The system runs the MML commands.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
Page 63
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 63/254
4.4 Checking the Syntax
The syntax checking function enables you to check the syntax of man-machine language (MML)commands before you run the commands in batches. This function improves the maintenance
efficiency.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The batch file is ready.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) of the specified version has been installed. If the plug-
in of version 1.6 is installed, the recommended version is 1.6.0.26. If the plug-in of version
1.7 is installed, the recommended version is 1.7.0.45.
Context
The following items are checked: absence of colons and semicolons, incorrect MML commands,
parameter redundancy, and incorrect parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 click New to create a batch file. You can edit MML commands in the command input pane.
NOTE
You can click Open to open a ready batch file.
Step 2 Click Analyze Syntax to check the batch file.
NOTE
l If no error is found, a Information dialog box is displayed to inform you that no error is found. If an error
is found, a dialog box is showing the check result is displayed to inform you of the command line number
and the error cause.
l You can double-click in the Result Information dialog box to locate the erroneous MML command line in
the batch file.
l After the syntax is checked, appears in front of the erroneous MML command line. If you pause the
mouse over , the system displays the error information.
l To check the syntax of an MML command line in the batch file, you can right-click the MML command
line and choose Analyze Current Line.
Step 3 In the Result Information dialog box, click Save As to save the check result.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
To clear the syntax check marks in the batch file, right-click in the batch file and choose Clear
Analyze Mark .
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
Page 64
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 64/254
4.5 Setting Parameters
You can set parameters in the MML Settings dialog box.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Procedure
Step 1 At the upper right corner of the MML tab page, click Settings.
The Settings dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Set parameters in the System Settings and Settings areas.
Step 3 Click OK . The settings are complete.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
Page 65
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 65/254
5 Managing Alarms and Events
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to manage alarms or events on the local maintenance terminal (LMT)
to analyze, locate, and clear faults.
5.1 Basic Concepts Related to Alarms or Events
Before managing base station alarms or events, you must understand the basic concepts related
to base station alarms or events, including their definitions, logs, severity, and network
management (NM) types.
5.2 Handling Alarms and EventsHandling alar ms or events involves the following actions: browsing active alarms or events,
querying alar m or event logs, querying alarm or event configurations, manually clearing alarms
or events, and querying alarm or event handling suggestions.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 5 Managing Alarms and Events
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
Page 66
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 66/254
5.1 Basic Concepts Related to Alarms or Events
Before managing base station alarms or events, you must understand the basic concepts relatedto base station alarms or events, including their definitions, logs, severity, and network
management (NM) types.
5.1.1 Alarm or Event Categories
This section describes the basic concepts related to alarms and events.
Alarm
An alarm is generated if the hardware is faulty or a major function fails. An alarm has a higher severity than an event. Based on the status of the faults, alarms can be categorized into active
alarms and clear alarms.
l If a fault is not cleared, the status of the alarm remains active. This type of alarm is called
an active alarm.
l If a fault is cleared, the status of the alarm changes to clear. This type of alarm is called a
clear alarm.
NOTE
l You can search a database for clear alarms.
l Alarms are cleared while you switch from the alarm query page to another page. After you switch
back to the original page, alarms will be updated in the page and the cleared alarms will not be displayedin the page.
Based on the engineering status of the NE that reported an alarm, the alarm can be an engineering
alarm or a normal alarm.
l If the NE is being installed, commissioned, upgraded, expanded, or relocated, the NE is in
the engineering state.
l The following are engineering alarms: alarms reported by physical or logical equipment in
the engineering state, alarms that are generated by the peer equipment and are associated
with the alarms reported by the equipment in the engineering state, and clear alarms
corresponding to engineering alarms.
Event
An event notifies users of important information when the system is operating correctly. Users
do not need to handle an event.
5.1.2 Alarm Severity
The alarm severity indicates the degree to which an alarm affects system performance. Based
on the severity, all alarms can be categorized into four types: critical, major, minor, and warning.
Table 5-1 describes alarm severities and provides handling suggestions for each.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 5 Managing Alarms and Events
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
Page 67
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 67/254
Table 5-1 Alarm severities and handling suggestions
Severity
Definition Handling Suggestion
Critical Service-affecting condition. Critical alarms requireimmediate attention, and must be cleared immediately.
For example, faulty devices need to be immediately
repaired or unavailable resources need to be
immediately restored.
These alarms must becleared immediately.
Otherwise, the system
may fail.
Major Degradation of service, but not a complete loss of
service. Major alarms must be cleared during working
hours. For example, faults that affect device
performance or resource performance must be fixed
during working hours, and their alarms must be cleared.
These alarms must be
cleared in a timely
manner. Otherwise,
some important
functions cannot be
implemented.
Minor Non-service-affecting condition. Minor alarms must be
handled within a certain time period to avoid severer
problems.
These alarms help
maintenance personnel
locate and clear
potential faults before
they become problems.
Warning Potential service-affecting condition. Warning alarms
must be handled based on the problems causing the
alarms.
These alarms help
maintenance personnel
learn about the
operating status of the
system.
5.1.3 NM Alarm Type
This section describes alarm types from the perspective of the network management (NM).
Based on NM standards, alarms are categorized as follows:
l Power alarm: related to the power system
l Environment alarm: related to environment of the equipment room
l Signaling alarm: related to service signaling
l Trunk alarm: related to the transport subsystem
l Hardware alarm: related to boards
l Software alarm: related to software
l Running alarm: related to the running of the system
l Communication alarm: related to the communication system
l Quality of service (QoS) alarm: related to QoS
l Integrity alarm: a type of security alarm, which indicates that information may be modified,
added, or removed without permission.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 5 Managing Alarms and Events
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
Page 68
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 68/254
l Operation alarm: a type of security alarm, which indicates that services are unavailable or
unreachable due to factors such as incorrect operations or faults.
l Physical resource alarm: a type of security alarm, which indicates that physical resources
are unavailable due to possible attacks.
l Security alarm: a type of security alarm, which indicates that the security service or security
mechanism detects that the system is experiencing attacks.
l Time domain alarm: a type of security alarm, which indicates that unexpected events have
occurred.
l Processing error alarm: related to processing errors.
5.1.4 Alarm Flags
Four alarm flags are provided: flag indicating whether an alarm is to be reported to the alarm
box, alarm masking flag, alarm modification flag, and alarm clearance flag.
Flag Indicating Whether an Alarm Is to Be Reported to the Alarm Box
This flag controls whether an alarm is to be reported to the alarm box. The flag status is as
follows:
l Report
In this status, the local maintenance terminal (LMT) instructs the alarm box to generate
audible and visual alarms.
l Not report
In this status, the LMT does not instruct the alarm box to generate audible and visual alarms
when alarms are reported or the alarm status is changed.
NOTE
This flag applies only to fault alarms, but not to event alarms.
An alarm can be reported to the alarm box only if this flag is set to Report for the alarm and the
alarm severity is greater than or equal to the severity specified for alarm reporting to the alarm
box.
Alarm Masking Flag
This flag controls whether an alarm is to be masked. The flag status is as follows:
l Mask
A board does not report an alarm for which this flag is set to Mask to the network
management system (NMS) or the alarm box. The server does not record the alarm log.
l Not mask
A board reports an alarm for which this flag is set to Not mask to the NMS and the alarm
box. The server records the alarm log.
Alarm Modification Flag
This flag indicates whether the alarm configuration has been modified, which facilitates the
query and restoration of the configuration. The flag status is as follows:
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 5 Managing Alarms and Events
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
Page 69
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 69/254
l Modified
After an MML command is executed to modify the alarm configuration, this flag is set to
Modified.
l Not modified
If the default alarm configuration is used or an MML command is executed to restore the
default alarm configuration, this flag is set to Not modified.
Alarm Clearance Flag
This flag indicates whether a fault alarm has been cleared. The flag status is as follows:
l Not cleared
The fault alarm has not been cleared yet.
l Cleared
A clear alarm has been reported, indicating that the fault alarm has been cleared.
5.2 Handling Alarms and Events
Handling alarms or events involves the following actions: browsing active alarms or events,
querying alarm or event logs, querying alarm or event configurations, manually clearing alarms
or events, and querying alarm or event handling suggestions.
5.2.1 Setting Alarm or Event Query Properties
Setting alarm or event query properties specifies the settings in an alarm or event display dialog
box. You can customize a color for each alarm or event severity and set alarm or event display
columns.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT.
Procedure
Step 1In the LMT main window, click Alarm/Event.
The Alarm/Event window is displayed.
Step 2 Click Settings in the upper right corner of the Alarm/Event window.
The Settings dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the properties of the Alarm/Event window as required.
NOTE
l To restore the default settings, click Restore Defaults.
l If Enable is selected from the Tips drop-down list, detailed information about an alarm or event is displayed
when you move your cursor over the alarm or event record on the Browse Alarm/Event and Query Alarm/Event Log tab pages.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 5 Managing Alarms and Events
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
Page 70
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 70/254
Step 4 Click OK .
----End
5.2.2 Browsing Active Alarms or Events Normal alarms, events, and engineering alarms reported to the local maintenance terminal
(LMT) are displayed on the Browse Alarm/Event tab page in real time. You can view the
detailed information about alarms and events to determine the real-time running status of the
system.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Alarm/Event. In the displayed Alarm/Event window, click
the Browse Alarm/Event tab. The Browse Alarm/Event tab page contains Normal Alarm,
Event, and Engineering Alarm tab pages.
NOTE
On the Normal Alarm tab page, normal alarms generated when the base station is in the common state are
displayed. On the Event tab page, event generated. On the Engineering Alarm tab page, engineering alarms
generated when the base station is in the engineering state are displayed.
Step 2 View the alarm or event information on the Browse Alarm/Event tab page.
Step 3 To view detailed information about an alarm, double-click the alarm record.
The Detailed Information dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 In the Detailed Information dialog box, click Solution to query the description, parameters,
impact on the system, system actions, possible causes, and handling procedure.
NOTE
You can drag the rows in the Browse Alarm/Event tab page to rearrange the row order. The row order in
the Browse Alarm/Event tab page will be the tab page within the Cookie validity period.
----End
5.2.3 Querying Alarm or Event Logs
You can query the historical alarms or events from the alarm or event logs to determine the
previous running status of the equipment.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT.
Procedure
l GUI mode
1. In the LMT main window, click Alarm/Event, and then click the Query Alarm/
Event Log tab in the Alarm/Event window.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 5 Managing Alarms and Events
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
Page 71
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 71/254
The Query Alarm/Event Log tab page is displayed.
To query the alarms or events generated and cleared within the specified time, click
the Basic tab. Table 5-2 describes the fields on the Basic tab page.
Table 5-2 Description of the fields on the Basic tab page
Field Description
Type Alarm or event type to be selected. By default, all the types
are selected.
Query All Alarms/
Events Raised Within
Time Range
l If you select the Query All Alarms/Events Raised
Within Time Range check box, the alarms or events
generated within the specified time are displayed.
l If you do not select the Query All Alarms/Events
Raised Within Time Range check box, the alarms or
events generated in the following time period are
displayed by default:
– Any date as the start date and any time as the start
time
– The current date as the end date and the current time
as the end time
Cleared Time l If you select Cleared Time, the alarms or events
generated within the specified time are displayed.
l If you do not select Cleared Time, the alarms or events
generated in the following time period are displayed by default:
– Any date as the start date and any time as the start
time
– The current date as the end date and the current time
as the end time
Severity Severities of the alarms or events to be selected. All the
severities are selected by default.
Max number of results Number of records in the query result. A maximum of
1000 records can be displayed, and the default number is
64.
To query a type of alarm or event based on the serial number, ID, event type, and
board location, click the Advanced tab. Table 5-3 describes the fields on the
Advanced tab page.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 5 Managing Alarms and Events
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
Page 72
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 72/254
Table 5-3 Description of the fields on the Advanced tab page
Field Description
Event Category Event types of the alarms or events to be selected. All the
types are selected by default.
ID IDs of the alarms or events to be selected.
Serial No. Serial numbers of the alarms or events to be selected.
Maintenance Mode Flag indicating the engineering status of the base station
that reported an alarm or event.
Board Location Position of a board that reports an alarm or event, for
example, Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No.
2. Set the search criteria as required.
3. Click Query. The query results are displayed in the Result area.
4. To view the detailed information about an alarm or event, double-click the alarm or
event record.
The Detailed Information dialog box is displayed.
5. In the Detailed Information dialog box, click Solution to query the description,
parameters, impact on the system, system actions, possible causes, and handling
procedure.
6. Click Close to exit the dialog box.
NOTE
You can drag the rows in the Browse Alarm/Event tab page to rearrange the row order. The
row order in the Browse Alarm/Event tab page will be the tab page within the Cookie validity
period.
l MML mode
Run the LST ALMLOG command.
----End
5.2.4 Querying Alarm or Event Configurations
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT).
Context
The available search criteria are as follows:
l ID
l Severity
l Modification Flag
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 5 Managing Alarms and Events
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
Page 73
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 73/254
l Shield Flag
l Return Amount
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Alarm/Event, and then click the Query Alarm/Event
Configuration tab in the displayed Alarm/Event window.
Step 2 Set the search criteria as required.
Step 3 Click Query. The query results are displayed in the Result area.
----End
5.2.5 Querying Alarm or Event Handling Suggestions
You can query detailed help information about an alarm or event based on alarm or eventhandling suggestions.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT).
Context
The detailed help information about an alarm involves the following:
l Alarm description
l Alarm attribute
l Alarm parameters
l Impact on system
l System actions
l Possible causes
l Handling procedure
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click an alarm on the Browse Alarm/Event or Query Alarm/Event Log tab page. The
Detailed Information dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the displayed Detailed Information dialog box, click Solution. The online help of the alarm
or event is displayed.
NOTE
You can also right-click an alarm or event and choose Solution to display the online help of the alarm or event.
Step 3 View the definition, attribute, parameters, impact on system, system actions, possible causes,
and handling procedure.
Step 4 Click the exit button in the upper right corner of the online help to exit it.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 5 Managing Alarms and Events
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
Page 74
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 74/254
5.2.6 Manually Refreshing Alarms or Events
When browsing or querying alarms or events, you can manually refresh the alarms or events
displayed on the Browse Alarm/Event or Query Alarm/Event Log tab page.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT).
Procedure
Step 1 Click Refresh or choose Refresh from the shortcut menu on the Browse Alarm/Event, Query
Alarm/Event Log, or Query Alarm/Event Configuration tab page.
NOTE
l The alarms or events are displayed on the Browse Alarm/Event tab page in real time. Therefore, after you
refresh the tab page, the cleared alarms or events are not displayed.
l The alarms or events are not displayed in real time on the Query Alarm/Event Log tab page. Therefore,
after you manually refresh the tab page, the alarms or events are updated and displayed based on the original
search criteria.
----End
5.2.7 Manually Clearing Alarms or Events
If the cause of an alarm or event is identified or the alarm or event can be ignored, you can
manually clear the alarm or event.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT).
Context
Manual alarm clearing applies only to alarms of the ADMC type instead of the ADAC type.
ADMC refers to automatically detected and manually cleared and ADAC refers to automatically
detected and automatically cleared.
Procedure
Step 1 Select an alarm or event to be manually cleared on the Browse Alarm/Event or Query Alarm/
Event Log tab page.
Step 2 Right-click the alarm or event and choose Clear from the shortcut menu or click Clear in the
lower right corner.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click Yes. The selected alarm or event is cleared, and its color automatically changes to the
color of a cleared alarm or event.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 5 Managing Alarms and Events
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
Page 75
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 75/254
5.2.8 Deleting Cleared Alarms or Events
When browsing active alarms or events or querying alarm or event logs, you can delete the
cleared alarms or events displayed on the Browse Alarm/Event or Query Alarm/Event Log
tab page.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT).
Procedure
Step 1 On the Browse Alarm/Event or Query Alarm/Event Log tab page, click Delete All, Delete
All Cleared Alarms, or Delete Selected Cleared Alarms to clear alarms as required. Table
5-4 describes the functions of these menu items.
Table 5-4 Menu item functions
Item Description
Delete All Deletes all the alarms on the Browse Alarm/Event or Query
Alarm/Event Log tab page.
Delete All Cleared
Alarms
Deletes all the cleared alarms on the Query Alarm/Event Log tab
page or on the Normal Alarm and Engineering Alarm tab pages
of the Browse Alarm/Event tab page.
Delete Selected
Cleared Alarms
Deletes all the selected cleared alarms on the Query Alarm/Event
Log tab page.
----End
5.2.9 Saving the Information About Alarms or Events
You can save all or part of the alarm or event records displayed on the Browse Alarm/Event
or Query Alarm/Event Log tab page as files in .csv format for future reference.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT).
Procedure
Step 1 On the Browse Alarm/Event or Query Alarm/Event Log tab page, right-click an alarm or
event record to be saved and choose Save Selected from the shortcut menu. The Save dialog
box is displayed.
Step 2 Enter the file name and specify the save path and file type.
Step 3 Click Save.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 5 Managing Alarms and Events
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
Page 76
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 76/254
6 Managing Message Tracing
About This Chapter
By tracing messages, you can verify data and identify faults. After a message tracing task is
created, the tr aced messages can be browsed and saved.
6.1 Overview of Message Tracing
This section describes message tracing tasks and the internal process of message tracing.
6.2 General Operations Related to Message Tracing
The general message tracing operations involve browsing, querying, and saving traced messages
and suspending, resuming, and closing a tracing task. The operations are applicable to allmessage tracing tasks.
6.3 Common Tracing Tasks
This section describes tracing tasks related to common services that are not specific to any radio
access technology (RAT).
6.4 GSM-specific Tracing Tasks
GSM-specific tracing tasks include tracing radio signaling link (RSL) and common signaling
link (CSL) messages over the Abis interface in the circuit switched (CS) domain.
6.5 UMTS-specific Tracing Tasks
After a message tracing task is created, the traced messages can be browsed and saved.
6.6 LTE-specific Tracing Tasks
This section describes LTE-specific tracing tasks.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
Page 77
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 77/254
6.1 Overview of Message Tracing
This section describes message tracing tasks and the internal process of message tracing.
Message Tracing Tasks
Message tracing traces interfaces, signaling links, and UEs. It applies to routine equipment
maintenance and fault location.
Only when the OM channel is established between the U2000 and the base station, and the correct
data configuration file is downloaded from the U2000 to the base station, the tracing task can
be performed on the LMT.
On the local maintenance terminal (LMT), common tracing tasks and GSM-, UMTS-, and LTE-
specific tracing tasks can be performed.
If the message Error returned from NE: Invalid board is displayed when a tracing task is
created during the base station deployment by PnP, run the DSP BRD command to check
whether the board for which the tracing task is created has been configured. If the board is not
configured, run ADD BRD to add the board. Restart the tracing task after the board is configured
successfully.
NOTE
l To use the tracing function, you must install jre-6u26-windows-i586-p-s.
l The tracing window is fixed in size and does not change with the web page.
Common tracing tasks are as follows:
l PTP Trace
l MAC Trace
l LACP Trace
l PPP Trace
l MP Trace
l IP Layer Protocol Trace
l SCTP Trace
l CMPv2 Trace
l IKE Trace
l PNP Trace
l Proxy PNP Trace
l ICP Trace
l SAAL Trace
l HDLC Trace
l IUANT Trace
l 485 Trace
l IPMI Trace
l RF Link Trace
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
Page 78
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 78/254
l Process Messages Trace
l RF Message Trace
GSM-specific tracing tasks are as follows:
l Tracing RSL Messages over the Abis Interface in the CS Domain
l Tracing CSL Messages over the Abis Interface in the CS Domain
l Sampling Carriers and RF Modules
UMTS-specific tracing tasks are as follows:
l DSP Trace
l Cell Trace
l User Trace
l Iub Trace
LTE-specific tracing tasks are as follows:
l S1 Interface Trace
l X2 Interface Trace
l Uu Interface Trace
l IFTS Trace
l M2 Interface Trace
l Se Interface Trace
Internal Process of Message Tracing
The internal process of message tracing involves creating a tracing task on the LMT and reporting
results to the LMT.
1. Creating a tracing task on the LMT.
a. After you create a tracing task on the LMT, the LMT sends a binary command to the
base station to create the task.
b. The base station allocates an ID to the task and forwards the command to the tracing
management module of a specified board.
c. After receiving the command, the tracing management module records the parameters
for tracing contained in the command in the filter table and sends messages to the
service processing module.
d. The service processing module updates the local filter table based on the messages
from the tracing management module.
2. Reporting results to the LMT
a. After receiving messages from the tracing management module, the service processing
module verifies that the parameters in the local filter table are updated. Then, it reports
the messages meeting filter criteria to the LMT based on the task IDs contained in the
messages.
b. The LMT analyzes the messages and displays tracing results.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
Page 79
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 79/254
6.2 General Operations Related to Message Tracing
The general message tracing operations involve browsing, querying, and saving traced messages
and suspending, resuming, and closing a tracing task. The operations are applicable to all
message tracing tasks.
6.2.1 Browsing Traced Messages Online
This section describes how to browse traced messages in the real-time message browsing
window online after a message tracing task is created.
Prerequisites
l The message tracing task has been successfully created.
l Traced messages are reported.
Procedure
Step 1 Browse traced messages in the message browsing window in real time. You can right-click a
traced message in the message browsing window and choose an item from the shortcut menu to
perform the associated operation as listed in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Operation instructions
Operation Description
Stop Trace Task Suspends a tracing task.
Restart Trace
Task
Resumes a tracing task.
Save All
Messages
Saves all messages in the message browsing window.
Save Selected
Messages
Saves selected messages in the message browsing window.
Auto Scroll Automatically refreshes messages in the message browsing window in real
time and scrolls up.
Clear Messages Removes all messages from the message browsing window.
Properties Views task properties.
NOTE
A maximum of 2000 records can be displayed in the message tracing window. If this number is exceeded,
the latest records will replace the earliest ones.
Step 2 Double-click a message to view its details.
The Message Browser dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-1.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
Page 80
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 80/254
Figure 6-1 Message Browser dialog box
----End
6.2.2 Viewing Message DetailsThis section describes how to view the details about a traced message in the message browsing
window after the task is created.
Prerequisites
l The message tracing task has been successfully created.
l Traced messages are reported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the message browsing window, double-click a message to be viewed.
The Message Browser dialog box is displayed, showing the details about the message, as shown
in Figure 6-2.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
Page 81
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 81/254
Figure 6-2 Message Browser dialog box
Step 2 Click in the upper right corner of the window to close the window.
----End
6.2.3 Saving Traced Messages
This section describes how to automatically and manually save traced messages. Traced
messages can be automatically saved in files to a local folder after the task is created. All or
some of the traced messages can also be manually saved when a tracing task is in process. A
maximum of 2000 messages can be saved.
Prerequisites
l The message tracing task has been successfully created.
l Traced messages are reported.
Context
l The default file name is Base Station IP address_Trace type_Year-Month-Day-Hour-
Minute-Second_key parameters.
l Traced messages are saved as files in .tmf format.
l If you clear the Save File check box when creating a tracing task, the messages displayed
in the message browsing window are not saved.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
Page 82
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 82/254
Procedure
l Automatically Saving Traced Messages
1. When a tracing task is created,Save File is selected by default. All messages displayed
in the message browsing window are saved automatically.NOTE
l The LMT saves every 2000 messages as a file. The messages from the 2001st are saved in
other files whose names are added with a sequence number. For example, the 2001st to
4000th SCTP messages are saved in a file named SCTPTRACE_Year-Month-Day-Hour-
Minute-Second_1 by default.
l You can use the Traffic Recording Review Tool to browse files in .tmf format. For details,
see 6.2.4 Browsing Traced Messages Offline.
l Manually Saving Traced Messages
1. Right-click in the message browsing window and choose Save All Messages, or right-
click one or more messages to be saved and choose Save Selected Messages.
The Save dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
l If traced messages are manually saved, all messages are displayed in the window. Currently, a
maximum of 2000 messages can be displayed in the window.
l A maximum of 2000 messages can be displayed in the window, that is, only the latest 2000
messages are displayed. Therefore, it is good practice to automatically save traced messages if
there are a great number of messages.
l You can use the Traffic Recording Review Tool to browse files in .tmf format. For details, see
6.2.4 Browsing Traced Messages Offline.
l To save all traced messages, do not select any message.
l To save some of the traced messages, select the messages first. Otherwise, Save Selected
Messages is unavailable after you right-click the selected messages.
2. Enter the file name, specify the save path, and click Save.
----End
6.2.4 Browsing Traced Messages Offline
This section describes how to use the Traffic Recording Review Tool to browse saved message
files offline.
Prerequisites
Traced messages have been saved.
The base station Maintenance and Commissioning Tool is installed.
Context
You can double-click a message file in .txt or .csv format to view the messages. A message file
in .tmf format must be opened using the Traffic Recording Review Tool.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
Page 83
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 83/254
Procedure
Step 1 Start the Traffic Recording Review Tool. Choose Start > All Programs > Huawei Local
Maintenance Terminal > Traffic Recording Review Tool.
The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Open dialog box
Step 2 Locate the folder that contains the message files, and then select the message file to be viewed.
The folder for saving these files is set when the task is started.
Step 3 Click Open. The contents of the message file are displayed, as shown in Figure 6-4.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
Page 84
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 84/254
Figure 6-4 Traffic Recording Review Tool window
Step 4 View these messages. You can double-click a message to view details, as shown in Figure
6-5.
Figure 6-5 Message Browser dialog box
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
Page 85
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 85/254
Step 5 To view other message files, choose File > Open. In the displayed Open dialog box, select and
open the message file to be viewed.
----End
6.3 Common Tracing Tasks
This section describes tracing tasks related to common services that are not specific to any radio
access technology (RAT).
6.3.1 PTP Trace
This section describes how to trace Precision Time Protocol (PTP) messages to locate faults on
PTP links. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced
messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l A maximum of one PTP message tracing task can be created at one time.
l The PTP clock links use the IEEE 1588V2 protocol.
NOTE
IEEE 1588V2 is a protocol of precise clock synchronization defined by IEEE. It is called "A Precision
Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked Measurement and Control Systems" and also referred to
as PTPv2.
l IEEE 1588V2 applies to the scenario where all nodes in a distributed network must be
precisely synchronized in terms of reference clocks. It provides a mechanism for achieving
time synchronization among all nodes using the same reference clock.
l The IEEE 1588V2 protocol transmits timestamps by means of message exchange to achieve
clock synchronization. If the IEEE 1588V2 protocol does not function properly, PTP
message tracing can be started to view IEEE 1588V2 messages.
l If all IEEE 1588V2 messages are traced, check the interval at which packets are transmitted
on the clock link. If packets are transmitted at small intervals, there are a large number of messages. Therefore, the tracing affects the system performance. You are advised not to
start multiple tracing tasks at the same time.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click PTP Trace.
The PTP Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3Set related parameters in the PTP Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-2.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
Page 86
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 86/254
Table 6-2 Parameters for PTP message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for PTP message
tracing is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for PTP message
tracing is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for PTP message tracing
is located.
PTP Clock Link
No.
Specifies the the PTP clock link number.
Trace Type Specifies the type of messages to be traced. The default value is
Signaling/Announce. The signaling and announce messages are used
for PTP clock source negotiation and selection.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-3 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-3 Results of PTP message tracing
Parameter Description
PTP Clock Link
No.
Indicates the PTP clock link number.
Trace Direction Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Address Type Indicates the address type of the 1588v2 clock source server.
NOTE
The value can be IPV4, MAC, or IPV6. The value IPV6 is specific to UMTS.
Server Address Indicates the address of the 1588v2 clock reference source server.
Message Type Indicates the type of the traced message.
Message Sub Type Indicates the subtype of the messages to be traced.
Content For details, see the IEEE 1588v2 protocol.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
Page 87
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 87/254
6.3.2 MAC Trace
This section describes how to trace Media Access Control (MAC) layer messages to locate the
problems of MAC layer protocol channels.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l A maximum of one MAC message tracing task can be created at one time.
l The protocol type, source MAC address, destination MAC address, VLAN tag, VLAN ID,
and VLAN priority are used for identifying messages at the MAC layer.
l You can choose one or more items from the protocol type, source MAC address, destination
MAC address, VLAN tag, VLAN ID, and VLAN priority to specify the scope of messagesto be traced. This helps you to trace messages more specific to a fault.
l Currently, packet capture at the MAC layer supports the IP, ARP, RARP, LLDP,
ETHOAM, OAM3AH, 802.1x, and SYNCETH protocol types. For details about how to
choose the protocol type, contact Huawei technical support.
l The following operations cannot be started simultaneously on one board: the Mac trace,
the IP trace, and the remote loopback that is either applied to all IP addresses or a specified
address.
l If the message Error returned from NE: Invalid board is displayed when a tracing task
is created during the base station deployment by PnP, run the DSP BRD command to check
whether the board for which the tracing task is created has been configured. If the board isnot configured, run ADD BRD to add the board. Restart the tracing task after the board is
configured successfully.
l In secure networking scenarios, packets are encrypted and decrypted at the IP layer. The
payload in the MAC packet is encrypted. Therefore, IP packets cannot be parsed at the
MAC layer. In this case, the search criteria for the IP layer is invalid for MAC message
tracing.
l In secure networking scenarios, TCP packets cannot be identified. As a result, TCP packets
cannot be filtered out during MAC message tracing, leading to packet capture loops on the
U2000. Therefore, remote MAC packet capturing on the U2000 is not supported. (Remote
MAC packet capturing on the WebLMT, to which users log in through the U2000 proxy,
is not included.) In this case, IP message tracing on the U2000 or local MAC messagetracing on the LMT can be started. Secure networking scenarios are as follows:
– The OMCH is configured with IPsec protection.
– The IPSECBIND MO takes effect on a board. You can run the LST IPSECBIND
command to check whether the IPSECBIND MO takes effect.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click MAC Trace.
The MAC Trace dialog box is displayed.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
Page 88
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 88/254
Step 3 Set related parameters in the MAC Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-4.
Table 6-4 Parameters for MAC message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for MAC message
tracing is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for MAC message
tracing is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for MAC message
tracing is located.
Subboard Type Specifies the type of the subboard for MAC message tracing. This
parameter can be set to:Eth Cover Board if Slot No. is set to 0 to 5.
Base Board or Eth Cover Board if Slot No. is set to 6 or 7.
Direction Specifies the direction of MAC messages to be traced. This parameter
can be set to Trace Receiver, Trace Sender, or Trace Both.
Frame Type Specifies the frame type of the MAC messages to be traced. This
parameter can be set to IP, ARP, RARP, LLDP, ETHOAM,
OAM3AH, 802.1x, SYNCETH, or ALL.
Minimum Frame
Length
Specifies the minimum frame length.
Maximum Frame
Length
Specifies the maximum frame length.
VLAN Tag Specifies the VLAN tag. This parameter can be set to Tagged, All, or
UnTagged.
VALN Priority Specifies the VLAN priority. This parameter is valid when VLAN
Tag is set to Tagged.
VALN ID Specifies the VLAN ID. This parameter is valid when VLAN Tag is set
to Tagged.
Local MAC
Address
Specifies the local MAC address.
Peer MAC
Address
Specifies the peer MAC address.
FrameFlow Upper
Threshold
Specifies the maximum number of packets to be reported per second.
NOTE
The packets are binary code streams.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
Page 89
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 89/254
Parameter Description
Extend Switch Specifies whether the filtering switch is turned on. This parameter can
be set to ON, or OFF. When the Frame Type is set to IP, this parameter
can be set.
Local IP Address Specifies the local IP address.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when Extend Switch is set to ON.
Peer IP Address Specifies the peer IP address.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when Extend Switch is set to ON.
DSCP Specifies the DSCP.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when Extend Switch is set to ON.
Protocol Type Indicates the protocol type. This parameter can be set to ALL, ICMP,
TCP, UDP, SCTP, or GTPU.
NOTE
GTPU is only specific to LTE.
Local Port Specifies the local port.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when Protocol Type is set to TCP, or UDP.
Peer Port Specifies the peer port.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when Protocol Type is set to TCP, or UDP.
GTPU TEID Specifies the GTPU TEID.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when Protocol Type is set to GTPU.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-5 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-5 Results of MAC message tracing
Parameter Description
Message Index Indicates the message index.
Trace Direction Indicates the trace direction.
Peer MAC
Address
Indicates the destination MAC address.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
Page 90
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 90/254
Parameter Description
Local MAC
Address
Indicates the source MAC address.
VLAN Priority Indicates the VLAN priority.
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
Protocol Type Indicates the protocol type of the traced message. The value can be
SYNCETH, IP, ARP, RARP, LLDP, ETHOAM, 802.3ah, 802.1x,
PPPOE Discover, or others.
Protocol
Timestamp
Indicates the message timestamp. Unit: 10 µs.
Content For details, see G.8264 protocols.
----End
6.3.3 LACP Trace
This section describes how to trace the negotiation of the Ethernet trunk protocol. Traced
messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online
or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l A maximum of one LACP message tracing task can be created at one time.
l Unsuccessful negotiation or inconsistent port status may occur during the negotiation of
the Ethernet trunk protocol. In this case, you can locate the problem by tracing messages.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click LACP Trace.
The LACP Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the LACP Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-6.
Table 6-6 Parameters for LACP message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP) message tracing is located.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
Page 91
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 91/254
Parameter Description
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for LACP message
tracing is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for LACP message tracing
is located.
Trunk No. Specifies the Ethernet trunk No. of the board for LACP message tracing.
Direction Specifies the direction of LACP messages to be traced. This parameter can
be set to Trace Receiver, Trace Sender, or Trace Both.
Subboard Type Specifies the type of the subboard for LACP message tracing. This
parameter can be set to:
Ethernet Cover Board if Slot No. is set to 0 to 5.
Base Board or Ethernet Cover Board if Slot No. is set to 6 or 7.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-7 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-7 Results of LACP message tracing
Parameter Description
Trace Direction Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Content For details, see the LACP protocol.
----End
6.3.4 PPP Trace
This section describes how to trace PPP messages to locate problems on the PPP links between
the base station and peer device. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You
can browse the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l A PPP link has been established.
Context
A maximum of one PPP message tracing task can be created at one time.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
Page 92
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 92/254
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click PPP Trace.
The PPP Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the PPP Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-8.
Table 6-8 Parameters for PPP message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for PPP message
tracing is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for PPP messagetracing is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for PPP message tracing
is located.
Subboard Type Specifies the type of the subboard for PPP message tracing. This parameter
can be set to:
E1 Cover Board if Slot No. is set to 0 to 5.
Base Board or Back Board if Slot No. is set to 6 or 7.
PPP Link No. Specifies the number of the PPP link for the message tracing.
Direction Specifies the direction of PPP messages to be traced. This parameter can
be set to Trace Receiver, Trace Sender, or Trace Both.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-9 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-9 Results of PPP message tracing
Parameter Description
Trace
Direction
Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Protocol Type Indicates the protocol type.
Content For details, see the PPP protocol.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
Page 93
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 93/254
6.3.5 MP Trace
This section describes how to trace messages on MP sub-links in an MP group to locate MP
group connection problems between the base station and peer device. Traced messages can be
automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l MP links have been added.
Context
A maximum of one MP message tracing task can be created at one time.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click MP Trace.
The MP Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the MP Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-10.
Table 6-10 Parameters for MP message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board to be traced is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board to be traced is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board to be traced is located.
Subboard Type Specifies the type of the subboard for MP message tracing. This parameter
can be set to:
E1 Cover Board if Slot No. is set to 0 to 5.
Base Board if Slot No. is set to 6 or 7.
MpGroup No. Specifies the number of the MP group.
Direction Specifies the direction of MP messages to be traced. This parameter can
be set to Trace Receiver, Trace Sender, or Trace Both.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-11 describes the message tracing results.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
Page 94
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 94/254
Table 6-11 Results of MP message tracing
Parameter Description
Trace Direction Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Protocol Type Indicates the protocol type.
Content For details, see the MP protocol.
----End
6.3.6 IP Layer Protocol Trace
This section describes how to trace IP layer protocol messages to locate the problems on IP layer
protocol channels. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse
the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l A maximum of one IP message tracing task can be created at one time.
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
lThe local IP address, peer IP address, protocol type, IP DSCP, local port number, and peer port number are used for identifying packets at the IP layer.
l You can specify the protocol type or source/destination port No. to limit the scope of packet
capture.
l Either the protocol type or port No. must be specified for locating transmission problems.
Otherwise, the packet capture is less useful for problem location.
l The TCP packets for LMT connection cannot be traced in the IP layer protocol message
tracing task.
l The following operations cannot be started simultaneously on one board: the Mac trace,
the IP trace, and the remote loopback that is either applied to all IP addresses or a specified
address.l If the message Error returned from NE: Invalid board is displayed when a tracing task
is created during the base station deployment by PnP, run the DSP BRD command to check
whether the board for which the tracing task is created has been configured. If the board is
not configured, run ADD BRD to add the board. Restart the tracing task after the board is
configured successfully.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Trace to open the Trace dialog box.
Step 2In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click IP Layer Protocol
Trace.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
Page 95
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 95/254
The IP Layer Protocol Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the IP Layer Protocol Trace dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 6-12.
Table 6-12 Parameters for IP layer protocol message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for IP message
tracing is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for IP message
tracing is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for IP message tracing
is located.
Frame Flow
Upper Threshold
Specifies the maximum number of packets to be reported per second.
Direction Specifies the transmission direction of packets to be captured.
Receive Report
Length Option
Specifies the length of received packets. This parameter can be set to
Same, Less, or No Report.
Max.Incoming IP
Packets
Specifies the maximum length of a received packet.
Transmit Report
Length Option
Specifies the length of transmitted packets. This parameter can be set to
Same, Less, or No Report.
Max.Outgoing IP
Packets
Specifies the maximum length of transmitted packets.
Report Type Specifies the type of packets to be captured. This parameter can be set
to Plaintext or Plaintext and Ciphertext.
IP Address Type Specifies the IP address type. This parameter can be set to IPV4.
VRF Specifies the ID of the virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance.
Local IP Address Specifies the local IP address.
Peer IP Address Specifies the peer IP address.
DSCP Specifies the DSCP.
Protocol Type Specifies the protocol type of the packets to be captured. This parameter
can be set to ICMP, UDP, SCTP, GTPU, TCP, or ALL.
NOTE
GTPU is specific only to LTE.
Local Port No. Specifies the local port number. This parameter is valid only when
Protocol Type is set to UDP or TCP.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
Page 96
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 96/254
Parameter Description
Peer Port No. Specifies the peer port number. This parameter is valid only when
Protocol Type is set to UDP or TCP.
GTPU TEID Specifies the GTPU TEID. This parameter is valid only when Protocol
Type is set to GTPU.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-13 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-13 Results of IP message tracing
Parameter Description
Message Index Indicates the internal serial number of a traced message.
Trace Direction Indicates the direction of a traced message.
Header Length Indicates the IP header length.
Version Indicates the IP version. The value 4 represents IPv4.
Type Of Service Indicates the service type (QoS value) of a traced message.
Total Length Indicates the IP packet length.
Identification Indicates the tag of a traced message. For details, see the IP protocol.
Fragment Offset
Field
Indicates the fragment offset of a traced message. For details, see the IP
protocol.
Time To Live Indicates the life time of a traced message. For details, see the IP
protocol.
Protocol Indicates the protocol type of a traced message. The value can be UDP,
SCTP, TCP, ICMP, AH, or ESP.
Checksum Indicates the IP checksum of a traced message. For details, see the IP
protocol.
Source Address Indicates the source IP address of a traced message.
Dest Address Indicates the destination IP address of a traced message.
Port Timestamp Indicates the timestamp (unit: 10 microseconds) of a traced message.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
Page 97
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 97/254
Parameter Description
Packet Sent
(Received)
Sequence Number
A packet has the same sequence number when it is sent or received in
plaintext and ciphertext format. When packets in both plaintext and
ciphertext formats are traced, this parameter specifies the sequence inwhich the packets in both plaintext and ciphertext formats are sent or
received.
When only packets in plaintext format are traced, this parameter
specifies the sequence in which the packets in plaintext format are sent
or received.
Packet Type Indicates the type of the packet that carries a traced message.
Packet Process
Result
Indicates the packet processing result.
Source Port Indicates the source port No. This parameter is valid for UDP, TCP, and
SCTP packets.
Destination Port Indicates the destination port No. This parameter is valid for UDP,
TCP, and SCTP packets.
UDP Length Indicates the Length of a UDP packet. This parameter is valid for UDP
packets.
UDP Checksum Indicates the checksum of a UDP packet. This parameter is valid for
UDP packets. For details, see the UDP protocol.
GTPU TEID Indicates the TEID of a GTPU packet. This parameter is valid for
GTPU packets. GTPU packets are a type of UDP packets.
SCTP
Verification Flag
Indicates the verification flag for SCTP packets. This parameter is valid
for SCTP packets. For details, see the SCTP protocol.
SCTP Checksum Indicates the checksum of an SCTP packet. This parameter is valid for
SCTP packets. For details, see the SCTP protocol.
Content For details, see the IP protocol.
----End
6.3.7 SCTP Trace
This section describes how to trace Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) messages to
locate faults on SCTP links. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can
browse the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
Page 98
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 98/254
Context
l A maximum of six SCTP message tracing task can be created at one time. In addition, the
tasks must differ in parameter settings.
l SCTP tracing affects system performance because SCTP links are busy. Therefore, do notstart multiple SCTP tracing tasks simultaneously.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click SCTP Trace.
The SCTP Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the SCTP Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-14.
Table 6-14 Parameters for SCTP message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for SCTP message
tracing is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for SCTP message
tracing is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for SCTP message tracingis located.
SCTP Link
No.
Specifies the number of the SCTP link to be traced.
Direction Specifies the direction of SCTP messages to be traced. This parameter can
be set to Trace Receiver, Trace Sender, or Trace Both.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-15 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-15 Results of SCTP message tracing
Parameter Description
No. Indicates the sequence of the traced message that received by the LMT.
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
Page 99
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 99/254
Parameter Description
Trace
Direction
Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Block Type Indicates the type of the traced packet.
Block Symbol Uniquely indicates the block symbol.
Block Length Indicates the length of the traced packet.
Content Indicates the SCTP protocol layer. For details, see the RFC4960 protocol.
----End
6.3.8 CMPV2 TraceThis section describes how to trace Certificate Management Protocol Version 2 (CMPV2)
messages. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced
messages online or offline. In addition, the traced messages can be resolved to display
Information Elements (IEs) contained in the messages.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l A maximum of one CMPV2 message tracing task can be created at one time.
l If the message Error returned from NE: Invalid board is displayed when a tracing task
is created during the base station deployment by PnP, run the DSP BRD command to check
whether the board for which the tracing task is created has been configured. If the board is
not configured, run ADD BRD to add the board. Restart the tracing task after the board is
configured successfully.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click CMPV2 Trace.
The CMPV2 Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the CMPV2 Trace dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 6-16.
Table 6-16 Parameters for CMPV2 message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for CMPV2 message
tracing is located.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
Page 100
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 100/254
Parameter Description
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for CMPV2 message
tracing is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for CMPV2 message tracing
is located.
Direction Specifies the direction of CMPV2 messages to be traced. This parameter can
be set to Trace Receiver, Trace Sender, or Trace Both.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-17 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-17 Results of CMPV2 message tracing
Parameter Description
Trace
Direction
Indicates the direction of traced messages.
Trace
Message Type
Indicates the protocol type of traced messages.
Content Contains only CMPV2 messages. For details, see RFC protocols and 3GPP
TS 33.310.
----End
6.3.9 IKE Trace
This section describes how to trace Internet Key Exchange (IKE) messages to locate IKE
negotiation issues or observe the IKE negotiation process. Traced messages can be automatically
or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l A maximum of one IKE message tracing task can be created at one time.
l In an IKE setup or rekey process, IKE negotiation may fail due to algorithm inconsistency
or certificate errors, packets cannot be encrypted because IKE tunnels are not successfully
established. As a result, packets are lost.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
Page 101
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 101/254
l Information such as the message type, request, and response about IKEv1 or IKEv2
message headers can be analyzed.
l IKE message tracing is a common message tracing task.
l If the message Error returned from NE: Invalid board is displayed when a tracing task
is created during the base station deployment by PnP, run the DSP BRD command to check
whether the board for which the tracing task is created has been configured. If the board is
not configured, run ADD BRD to add the board. Restart the tracing task after the board is
configured successfully.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click IKE Trace.
The IKE Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the IKE Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-18.
Table 6-18 Parameters for IKE message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for IKE message
tracing is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for IKE message
tracing is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for IKE message tracing
is located.
Direction Specifies the direction of IKE messages to be traced.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-19 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-19 Results of IKE message tracing
Parameter Description
Trace Direction Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Content For details, see the IKE protocol.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
Page 102
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 102/254
6.3.10 PNP Trace
This section describes how to trace the site deployment process. Traced messages can be
automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l A maximum of one PNP message tracing task can be created at one time.
l The real-time tracing function for site deployment includes receiving, sending, checking,
and handling of messages. In case of a failure, the failure cause is displayed.
l The real-time tracing function can be enabled only by the managing mode of a multimode
base station, only partial deployment information is visible to the non-managing mode.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > PNP Trace. Double-click PNP Trace.
The PNP Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the PNP Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-20.
Table 6-20 Parameters for PNP message tracing
Parameter Description
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-21 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-21 Results of PNP message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet:Subrack
:Slot
Indicates the cabinet, subrack, and slot information about the traced board.
CPUID Indicates the ID of the CPU for the traced board.
Message Type Indicates the type of a message, which can be binary or text.
Content For details, see the site deployment records.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
Page 103
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 103/254
----End
6.3.11 Proxy PNP TraceThis section describes how to trace and record the deployment procedure of the target base station
that requires emergency maintenance.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The emergency OM channel has been successfully established.
Context
l The real-time tracing function for site deployment includes receiving, sending, checking,
and handling of messages. In case of a failure, the failure cause is displayed.
l The real-time tracing function can be enabled only by the managing mode of a multimode
base station. During a mode election, the course is visible to the non-managing mode. When
the transmission board is determined, the deployment information is invisible to the non-
managing mode.
l For configurations of an emergency OM channel, see 2.8 Configuring an Emergency OM
Channel.
l PNP tracing using the proxy base station applies only to the IP protocol stack.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Proxy PNP Trace. Double-click Proxy PNP Trace.
The Proxy PNP Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Proxy PNP Trace dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 6-22.
Table 6-22 Parameters for proxy PNP message tracing
Parameter Description
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-23 describes the message tracing results.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
Page 104
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 104/254
Table 6-23 Results of proxy PNP message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet:Subrack
:Slot
Indicates the cabinet, subrack, and slot information about the traced board.
CPUID Indicates the ID of the CPU for the traced board.
Message Type Indicates the type of a message, which can be binary or text.
Content For details, see the site deployment records.
----End
6.3.12 ICP TraceThis section describes how to trace IMA Control Protocol (ICP) messages to locate problems
on the IMA link between the base station and peer device. Traced messages can be automatically
or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l A maximum of four ICP message tracing task can be created at one time. In addition, the
tasks must differ in parameter settings.
l This task is specific only to UMTS.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click ICP Trace.
The ICP Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the ICP Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-24.
Table 6-24 Parameters for ICP message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for ICP message tracing
is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for ICP message tracing
is located.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
Page 105
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 105/254
Parameter Description
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for ICP message tracing is
located.
Subboard
Type
Specifies the subboard type. This parameter can be set to:
E1 Cover Board if Slot No. is set to 0 to 5.
Base Board if Slot No. is set to 6 or 7.
IMA Group
No.
Specifies the number of the IMA group for ICP message tracing.
Direction Specifies the direction of ICP messages to be traced. This parameter can be
set to Trace Receiver, Trace Sender, or Trace Both.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-25 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-25 Results of ICP message tracing
Parameter Description
TraceDirection
Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Content For details, see the ICP protocol.
----End
6.3.13 SAAL Trace
This section describes how to trace Signaling ATM Adaptation Layer (SAAL) messages to locate
faults on the SAAL link. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l A maximum of four SAAL message tracing task can be created at one time. In addition,
the tasks must differ in parameter settings.
l This task is specific only to UMTS.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
Page 106
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 106/254
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click SAAL Trace.
The SAAL Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the SAAL Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-26.
Table 6-26 Parameters for SAAL message tracing
Parameter Description
SAAL Link
No.
Specifies the number of the SAAL link to be traced.
Message Type Specifies the type of messages to be traced.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-27 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-27 Results of SAAL message tracing
Parameter Description
SAAL Link
No.
Indicates the link number of the traced SAAL link.
Trace
Direction
Indicates the direction of the traced message.
PDU Message
Type
Indicates the PDU type of the traced message.
Content For details, see the SAAL protocol.
----End
6.3.14 HDLC Trace
This section describes how to trace High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) messages. Traced
messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online
or offline. In addition, the traced messages can be resolved to display Information Elements
(IEs) contained in the messages.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
Page 107
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 107/254
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
A maximum of six HDLC tracing tasks can be created on a main control board. In addition, the
tasks must differ in parameter settings.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click HDLC Trace.
The HDLC Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the HDLC Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-28.
Table 6-28 Parameters for HDLC message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for HDLC message
tracing is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for HDLC message
tracing is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for HDLC message
tracing is located.
Trace Frame Type Specifies the frame type for HDLC message tracing. This parameter can
be set to I Frame, S Frame, or U Frame.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-29 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-29 Results of HDLC message tracing
Parameter Description
Trace Direction Indicates the direction of the traced message.
HDLC Address Indicates the address type of traced HDLC messages.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
Page 108
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 108/254
Parameter Description
Control Frame
Type
Indicates the type of the traced control frame.
NR Indicates the value of the traced NR.
NS Indicates the value of the traced NS.
PF Indicates the value of the traced PF.
Content For details, see the HDLC protocol.
----End
6.3.15 IUANT TraceThis section describes how to trace IUANT messages. In addition, you can resolve the traced
messages to display information elements (IEs) in the messages. Traced messages can be
automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l The pRRU3901 does not support this function.
l Only one IUANT message tracing task can be created on a main control board at one time,
and the parameter settings for each task cannot be identical.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click IUANT Trace.
The IUANT Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the IUANT Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-30.
Table 6-30 Parameters for IUANT message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for IUANT message
tracing is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for IUANT message
tracing is located.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
Page 109
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 109/254
Parameter Description
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for IUANT message
tracing is located.
Device No. Specifies the number of the device for IUANT message tracing.
Node No. Specifies the number of the node for IUANT message tracing. This
parameter can be set to Application, Driver, or All.
Frame Type This parameter can be set to I Frame, S Frame, or U Frame.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when Node No. is set to Application.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-31 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-31 Results of IUANT message tracing
Parameter Description
No. Indicates the sequence number of the traced message
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
Cabinet:Subrac
k:Slot
Indicates the cabinet, subrack, and slot information about the traced board.
Link ID Indicates the link ID of the traced message.
Trace Direction Indicates the direction of the traced message.
HDLC Address Indicates the traced HDLC type.
HDLC Frame
Type
Indicates the type of the traced control frame.
N(R) Indicates the value of the traced NR.
N(S) Indicates the value of the traced NS.
P/F Indicates the value of the traced PF.
Content For details, see the IUANT protocol.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
Page 110
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 110/254
6.3.16 485 Trace
This section describes how to trace 485 messages. In addition, the traced messages can be
resolved to display information elements (IEs) in the messages. Traced messages can be
automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
Only one 485 message tracing task can be created on a main control board at one time, and the
parameter settings for each task cannot be identical.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click 485 Trace.
The 485 Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the 485 Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-32.
Table 6-32 Parameters for 485 message tracing
Parameter Description
Trace Type Specifies the trace type. This parameter can be set to CSS or Portand
Added.
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for 485 message tracing
is located. This parameter is valid only when Trace Type is set to CSS.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for 485 message
tracing is located. This parameter is valid only when Trace Type is set to
CSS.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for 485 message tracing
is located. This parameter is valid only when Trace Type is set to CSS.
Manager
Cabinet No.
Specifies the number of the manager cabinet where the board for 485
message tracing is located. This parameter is valid only when Trace
Type is set to Portand Added.
Manager
Subrack No.
Specifies the number of the manager subrack where the board for 485
message tracing is located. This parameter is valid only when Trace
Type is set to Portand Added.
Port No. Specifies the number of the port for 485 message tracing. This parameter
is valid only when Trace Type is set to Portand Added.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
Page 111
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 111/254
Parameter Description
Device
Address
Specifies the address of the device for 485 message tracing. This parameter
is valid only when Trace Type is set to Portand Added.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-33 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-33 Results of 485 message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Indicates the cabinet number.
Subrack No. Indicates the subrack number.
Slot No. Indicates the slot number.
Manager
Cabinet No.
Indicates the manager cabinet number.
Manager
Subrack No.
Indicates the manager subrack number.
Port No. Indicates the port number.
Device
Address
Indicates the device address.
Message
Direction
Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Content For details, see the 485 protocol.
----End
6.3.17 IPMI Trace
This section describes how to trace Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) messages.
In addition, you can resolve the traced messages to display information elements (IEs) in the
messages. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced
messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
Page 112
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 112/254
Context
A maximum of three IPMI message tracing task can be created at one time. In addition, the tasks
must differ in parameter settings.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click IPMI Trace.
The IPMI Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the IPMI Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-34.
Table 6-34 Parameters for IPMI message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for IPMI message
tracing is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for IPMI message
tracing is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for IPMI message tracing
is located.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-35 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-35 Results of IPMI message tracing
Parameter Description
No. Indicates the sequence of the traced message that received by the LMT.
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
CabinetNo.:Su
brackNo.:Slot
No.
Indicates the cabinet, subrack, and slot information about the traced board.
Trace
Direction
Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Content For details, see the IPMI protocol.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
Page 113
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 113/254
6.3.18 RF Link Trace
This section describes how to trace protocol messages over RF links of the base station. Traced
messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online
or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
A maximum of four RF link tracing tasks can be created on one main control board.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Trace.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services, and double-click RF Link Trace.
The RF Link Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the RF Link Trace dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 6-36.
Table 6-36 Parameters for RF link tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for RF link tracing is
located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for RF link tracing is
located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for RF link tracing is
located.
CPU ID Specifies the ID of the CPU. The value range of this parameter is from 0 to
255.
BUS ID Specifies the ID of the bus. The value range of this parameter is from 0 to255.
Device ID The value range of this parameter is from 0 to 255.
Link Type Specifies the type of the RF link. This parameter can be set to AISG,
MBUS, HPI, or TCP.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
Page 114
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 114/254
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-37 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-37 Results of the RF link tracing
Parameter DescriptionCPUID Indicates the ID of the CPU in the reported message.
BUS ID Indicates the ID of the bus in the reported message.
Device ID Indicates the ID of the device in the reported message.
Link Type Indicates the type of the RF link in the reported message.
Content Indicates the content of the reported message.
----End
6.3.19 Process Message Trace
This section describes how to trace protocol messages between processes. Traced messages can
be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline. In
addition, the traced messages can be resolved to display IEs contained in the messages.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l A maximum of 10 internal tracing tasks can be created. In addition, the tasks must differ
in parameter settings.
l Message From NBAP/ALCAP to SAAL, and Message From SAAL to NBAP/
ALCAP are applicable to only UMTS.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click Process MessageTrace.
The Process Message Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Process Message Trace dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 6-38.
Table 6-38 Parameters for message tracing over process
Parameter Description
Mode Specifies the tracing mode. This parameter can be set to Trace Mode, Cut
Mode, or Both Trace Mode.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
Page 115
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 115/254
Parameter Description
Action Side Specifies the sender or receiver side where messages are to be traced. This
parameter can be set to Sender Side, or Receiver Side.
Sender CPU
ID
Specifies the ID of the sender CPU.
Sender PID Specifies the ID of the sender process.
Receiver CPU
ID
Specifies the ID of the receiver CPU.
Receiver PID Specifies the ID of the receiver process.
Report
Message Type
Specifies the message type. This parameter can be set to Measurement
Report, RTWP Report, FP Control Frame, Message From NBAP/
ALCAP to SAAL, or Message From SAAL to NBAP/ALCAP.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Based on the information in the window, you can
view message flows. Table 6-39 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-39 Results of message tracing over process
Parameter Description
Mode Indicates the tracing mode.
Action Side Indicates the sender or receiver side where the message is traced.
Sender CPU
ID
Indicates the ID of the sender CPU.
Sender PID Indicates the ID of the sender process.
Receiver CPU
ID
Indicates the ID of the receiver CPU.
Receiver PID Indicates the ID of the receiver process.
Message Type Indicates the message type.
Content Indicates the message content.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
Page 116
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 116/254
6.3.20 RF Message Trace
This section describes how to trace protocol messages over RF interfaces of the base station.
Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages
online or offline.
Context
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l A maximum of four RF message tracing tasks can be created on one main control board.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Trace.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services, and double-click RF MessageTrace.
The RF Message Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the RF Message Trace dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 6-40.
Table 6-40 Parameters for RF message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Indicates the number of the cabinet where the board for RF message tracingis located.
Subrack No. Indicates the number of the subrack where the board for RF message tracing
is located.
Slot No. Indicates the number of the slot where the board for RF message tracing is
located.
Sender CPU
ID
Specifies the ID of the sender CPU.
Sender PID Specifies the ID of the sender process.
Receiver CPU
ID
Specifies the ID of the receiver CPU.
Receiver PID Specifies the ID of the receiver process.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-41 describes the message tracing results.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
Page 117
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 117/254
Table 6-41 Results of the RF message tracing
Parameter Description
Sender CPU
ID
Indicates the CPU ID of the sender in the reported message.
Sender PID Indicates the process ID of the sender in the reported message.
Receiver CPU
ID
Indicates the CPU ID of the receiver in the reported message.
Receiver PID Indicates the ID of the process ID of the receiver in the reported message.
Content Indicates the content of the reported message.
----End
6.4 GSM-specific Tracing Tasks
GSM-specific tracing tasks include tracing radio signaling link (RSL) and common signaling
link (CSL) messages over the Abis interface in the circuit switched (CS) domain.
6.4.1 Tracing RSL Messages over the Abis Interface in the CSDomain
This section describes how to use the local maintenance terminal (LMT) to trace radio signalinglink (RSL) messages over the Abis interface. RSL messages are exchanged between the base
station controller (BSC) and base transceiver station (BTS) during call processes. The message
types include measurement reports, channel requests, paging, RLM, and TRXM.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > GSM Services. Double-click Abis Interface CS Trace
(RSL).
The Abis Interface CS Trace(RSL) dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Abis Interface CS Trace(RSL) dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 6-42.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
Page 118
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 118/254
Table 6-42 Parameters for RSL message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain
Parameter Description
Message
Type
Specifies the type of messages to be traced.
Trace
Target
Specifies the index of the carrier to be traced. The value range is from 0 to
23999.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-43 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-43 Results of RSL message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain
Parameter Description
No. Indicates the sequence number of the traced message.
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
Trace
Direction
Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Trx No. Indicates the number of the carrier where messages are traced.
Trx ID Indicates the ID of the carrier where messages are traced.
Cell ID Indicates the ID of the cell where messages are traced.
Message
Type
Indicates the type of the traced message.
Content For details, see CS Trace Interface Protocol .
----End
6.4.2 Tracing CSL Messages over the Abis Interface in the CSDomain
This section describes how to use the local maintenance terminal (LMT) to trace common
signaling link (CSL) messages over the Abis interface. CSL messages are exchanged between
the base station controller (BSC) and base transceiver station (BTS) during call processes.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
Page 119
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 119/254
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > GSM Services. Double-click Abis Interface CS Trace
(CSL).
The Abis Interface CS Trace(CSL) dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Abis Interface CS Trace(CSL) dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 6-44.
Table 6-44 Parameters for CSL message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain
Parameter Description
Message
Type
Specifies the type of messages to be traced.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-45 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-45 Results of CSL message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain
Parameter Description
No. Indicates the sequence number of the traced message.
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
Trace
Direction
Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Message
Type
Indicates the type of the traced message.
Content For details, see CS Trace Interface Protocol .
----End
6.4.3 Sampling Carriers and RF Modules
The section describes how to sample the number of carriers and RF modules on the local
maintenance terminal (LMT). The sampling result is not displayed in the LMT.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
Page 120
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 120/254
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > GSM Services. Double-click TRX RF Sampling.
The TRX RF Sampling dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the TRX RF Sampling dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 6-46.
Table 6-46 Parameters for carriers and RF unit sampling
Parameter Description
TRX ID Specifies the index of a carrier. The value range of this parameter is from 0
to 8191.
Sampling
Type
Specifies the sampling type. The value range of this parameter is from 0 to
255.
Sub Sampling
Type
Specifies the sub-sampling type. The value range of this parameter is from
0 to 255.
Step 4 Click Submit to sample carriers and RF modules.
----End
6.5 UMTS-specific Tracing Tasks
After a message tracing task is created, the traced messages can be browsed and saved.
6.5.1 DSP Trace
This section describes how to trace digital signal processor (DSP) service messages. In addition,
you can resolve the traced messages to display information elements (IEs) in the messages.
Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages
online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
A maximum of 4 DSP tracing tasks can be created on a NE at one time. In addition, the tasks
must differ in parameter settings.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
Page 121
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 121/254
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > UMTS Services. Double-click DSP Trace.
The DSP Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click the Basic tab page and set the related parameters. Table 6-47 describes parameters on the
Basic tab page.
Table 6-47 Parameters on the Basic tab page for DSP message tracing
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for DSP message
tracing is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for DSP message tracing
is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for DSP message tracingis located.
DSP ID Specifies DSP ID.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click the Uu tab page, set the Uu Message Type. Table 6-48 describes parameters on the Uu
tab page.
Table 6-48 Parameters on the Uu tab page for DSP message tracing
Parameter Description
Uu Message
Type
Specifies the types of messages to be traced over the Uu interface.
Step 5 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-49 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-49 Results of DSP message tracing
Parameter Description
No. Indicates the sequence of the traced message that received by the LMT.
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
Message No. Indicates the sequence number of the traced message.
Tracing Entity
ID
Indicates the tracing entity ID.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
Page 122
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 122/254
Parameter Description
Message
Category
Indicates the category of the traced message.
Message Type Indicates the type of the traced message.
Content Indicates the content of the traced message.
----End
6.5.2 Cell Trace
This section describes how to trace cell-specific messages to locate cell-specific message
problems. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced
messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l A maximum of three cell-specific message tracing task can be created at one time. In
addition, the tasks must differ in parameter settings.
l The RRU3808, MRFU V1, MRFU V2, RRU3805, and RRU3908 V1 do not support the
following three trace items: (RRU)Channel Information, (RRU)Custom-collection
Datas, and (RRU)Module-collection Datas.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > UMTS Services. Double-click Cell Trace.
The Cell Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click the Basic tab page and set the related parameters. Table 6-50 describes parameters on the
Basic tab page.
Table 6-50 Parameters on the Basic tab page for cell-specific message tracing
Parameter Description
Logic Cell ID Specifies the ID of the cell to be traced.
Trace Type Specifies the trace type. This parameter can be set to Cell, or All Users.
Information
Level
Specifies the information level of the traced message. This parameter can
be set to Key, or Detail.
Trace Mode Specifies the information mode of the traced message. This parameter can
be set to Common Message Report, or Compressed Message Report.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
Page 123
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 123/254
Parameter Description
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click the Iub tab page or the Uu tab page, select the message type.
l Table 6-51 describes the parameters on the Iub tab page.
Table 6-51 Parameters on the Iub tab page for cell-specific message tracing
Parameter Description
Iub Message
Type
Specifies the types of messages to be traced over the Iub interface.
l Table 6-52 describes parameters on the Uu tab page.
Table 6-52 Parameters on the Uu tab page for cell-specific message tracing
Parameter Description
Uu Message
Type
Specifies the types of messages to be traced over the Uu interface.
Step 5 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-53 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-53 Results of cell-specific message tracing
Parameter Description
No. Indicates the sequence of the traced message that received by the LMT.
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
Message No. Indicates the sequence number of the traced message.
Tracing Entity
ID
Indicates the tracing entity ID.
Message
Category
Indicates the category of the traced message.
Message Type Indicates the type of the traced message.
Content Indicates the content of the traced message.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
Page 124
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 124/254
6.5.3 User Trace
This section describes how to trace UE-specific messages to locate UE-specific message
problems. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced
messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l You are obligated to take considerable measures, in compliance with the laws of the
countries concerned, to ensure that the personal data of users is fully protected. For example,
you can enable user identity anonymity and delete the tracing files after the problems are
handled.
l UE-specific messages can be traced by CRNC ID, Chain Time, IMSI, or CELL ID.
If UE-specific messages are to be traced by IMSI, determine whether the IMSI data to be
entered must be anonymous by running the LST USERIDANONSWITCH command and
checking the value of User Identity Anonymity Switch in the command output.
– If User Identity Anonymity Switch is ON, anonymous IMSI data needs to be entered
in IMSI. Anonymous IMSI data can be obtained by entering the IMSI and a key in the
anonymization tool HMACUtil.
– If User Identity Anonymity Switch is OFF, the IMSI can be directly entered in
IMSI.
NOTE
l The anonymization switch and the key can be modified on the U2000 by choosing Monitor >
Signaling Trace > Anonymous Policy Management (traditional style), or by choosing Signaling
Trace > Anonymous Policy Management (application style). For details, see U2000 Fault
Management User Guide.
l If the anonymization switch or the key is modified on the U2000 after a UE-specific message tracing
task is started, you need to stop the task and restart it after the modification.
l To obtain the anonymization tool HMACUtil, contact Huawei technical support.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > UMTS Services. Double-click User Trace.
The User Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click the Basic tab page and set the related parameters. Table 6-54 describes parameters on the
Basic tab page.
Table 6-54 Parameters on the Basic tab page for UE-specific message tracing
Parameter Description
Trace Method Specifies the tracing method.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
Page 125
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 125/254
Parameter Description
CRNC ID Specifies the CRNC ID. This parameter is valid when Trace Method is set
to CRNC ID.
Trace Time
(10s)
Specifies the tracing duration. This parameter is valid when Trace
Method is set to Chain Time.
User Number Specifies the number of UEs to be traced. This parameter is valid when
Trace Method is set to Chain Time.
Begin Time Specifies the time when the tracing starts. This parameter is valid when
Trace Method is set to Chain Time.
End Time Specifies the time when the tracing ends. This parameter is valid when Trace
Method is set to Chain Time.
IMSI ID Specifies the IMSI. This parameter is valid when Trace Method is set toIMSI.
CELL ID Specifies the cell ID. This parameter is valid when Trace Method is set to
CELL ID.
Fault Type Specifies the fault type. This parameter can be set to KPI SRB, KPI TRB,
HSDPA, or HSUPA.
Trace Mode Specifies the compression flag, indicating whether a packet is compressed.
This parameter can be set to Common Message Report or Compressed
Message Report.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
NOTE
l After Fault Type is specified, the manually selected message types on the Iub and Uu tab pages are
automatically cleared and the message types of the selected fault type are automatically selected.
l If multiple fault types are selected for Fault Type, all message types of the selected fault types will be
automatically selected on the Iub and Uu tab pages.
Step 4 Click the Iub tab page or the Uu tab page, select the message type.
l Table 6-55 describes the parameters on the Iub tab page.
Table 6-55 Parameters on the Iub tab page for UE-specific message tracing
Parameter Description
Iub Message
Type
Specifies the types of messages to be traced over the Iub interface.
l Table 6-56 describes parameters on the Uu tab page.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
Page 126
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 126/254
Table 6-56 Parameters on the Uu tab page for UE-specific message tracing
Parameter Description
Uu Message
Type
Specifies the types of messages to be traced over the Uu interface.
Step 5 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Based on the information in the window, you can
view message flows. Table 6-57 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-57 Results of UE-specific message tracing
Parameter Description
No. Indicates the sequence of the traced message that received by the LMT.
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
Message No. Indicates the sequence number of the traced message.
Tracing Entity
ID
Indicates the tracing entity ID.
Message
Category
Indicates the category of the traced message.
Message Type Indicates the type of the traced message.
Content Indicates the content of the traced message.
----End
6.5.4 Iub Trace
This section describes how to trace messages over the Iub interface. Traced messages can be
automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l A maximum of four Iub message tracing task can be created at one time. In addition, the
tasks must differ in parameter settings.
l If you create the task and is prompted with a message indicating that the system is busy
and the task fails to be created, the central processing unit (CPU) is overloaded. If this
happens, try again 30 seconds after the CPU overload is relieved.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
Page 127
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 127/254
l Under heavy traffic, if commands fail to be delivered while Iub tracing starts, the CPU is
overloaded. In this case, deliver the commands again 30 seconds after Iub tracing is
disabled.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > UMTS Services. Double-click Iub Trace.
The Iub Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the related parameters. For details about parameter descriptions, see Table 6-58.
Table 6-58 Parameters for message tracing over the Iub interface
Parameter Description
NBAP
Message
Specifies the NodeB application part (NBAP) messages to be traced.
ALCAP
Message
Specifies the Access Link Control Application Part (ALCAP) messages to be
traced.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-59 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-59 Results of message tracing over the Iub interface
Parameter Description
No. Indicates the sequence of the traced message that received by the LMT.
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
Trace
Direction
Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Message
Type
Indicates the type of the traced message.
Content For details, see the Iub interface protocol.
----End
6.6 LTE-specific Tracing Tasks
This section describes LTE-specific tracing tasks.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
Page 128
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 128/254
6.6.1 S1 Interface Trace
This section describes how to trace control plane messages over the S1 interface. Traced
messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages onlineor offline. In addition, the traced messages can be resolved to display Information Elements
(IEs) contained in the messages.
Context
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l A maximum of five message tracing tasks can be created simultaneously over an S1
interface.
l This task is specific to LTE.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > LTE Services. Double-click S1 Interface Trace.
The S1 Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the S1 Interface Trace dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 6-60.
Table 6-60 Parameters for message tracing over the S1 interface
Parameter Description
Direction Specifies the direction of messages to be traced over the S1 interface. This
parameter can be set to Bidirectional, To MME, or From MME.
Trace object Specifies the MME for the tracing. This parameter can be set to All MMEs
or Specified MME.
S1 Interface
ID
Specifies the S1 interface ID. After an interface ID is specified, the messages
related to the MME are traced.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when Trace object is set to Specified MME.
Message
Type
Specifies the message type. You can select one, multiple, or all message types.
If Select All is selected, all messages are traced. Otherwise, only the selected
types of messages are traced.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-61 describes the message tracing results.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
Page 129
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 129/254
Table 6-61 Results of message tracing over the S1 interface
Parameter Description
No. Indicates the sequence of the traced message that received by the LMT.
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
Standard
Interface
Message
Type
Indicates the type of the standard interface message.
Trace
Direction
Indicates the message direction.
S1 Interface
ID
Indicates the ID of the S1 interface.
Call ID Indicates the ID of the traced call.
PLMN Indicates the message PLMN.
Content The version number traced over the S1 interface is 10Q1, and the traced
protocol layer is S1 AP. For details, see 3GPP TS 36.413.
----End
6.6.2 X2 Interface TraceThis section describes how to trace control plane messages over the X2 interface. Traced
messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online
or offline. In addition, the traced messages can be resolved to display Information Elements
(IEs) contained in the messages.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
ContextA maximum of five message tracing tasks can be created simultaneously over an X2 interface.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > LTE Services. Double-click X2 Interface Trace.
The X2 Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3Set related parameters in the X2 Interface Trace dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 6-62.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
Page 130
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 130/254
Table 6-62 Parameters for message tracing over the X2 interface
Parameter
Description
Direction Specifies the direction of messages to be traced over the X2 interface. This parameter can be set to Bidirectional, To eNodeB, or From eNodeB.
Trace
object
Specifies the eNodeB to be traced. This parameter can be set to ALL eNodeBs
or Specified eNodeB.
Peer
eNodeB
ID
Specifies the peer eNodeB ID. After an eNodeB ID is specified, the messages
related to the eNodeB are traced.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when Trace object is set to Specified eNodeB.
Message
Type
Specifies the types of messages to be traced over the X2 interface. You can select
one, multiple, or all message types. If Select All is selected, all messages aretraced. Otherwise, only the selected types of messages are traced.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically saved.
Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-63 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-63 Results of message tracing over the X2 interface
Parameter
Description
No. Indicates the sequence of the traced message that received by the LMT.
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
Standard
Interface
Message
Type
Indicates the type of the standard interface message.
Trace
Direction
Indicates the message direction.
eNodeB
ID
Indicates the peer eNodeB ID.
Call ID Indicates the ID of the traced call.
PLMN Indicates the message PLMN.
Content The version number traced over the X2 interface is 10Q1, and the traced protocol
layer is X2 AP. For details, see 3GPP TS 36.423.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
Page 131
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 131/254
----End
6.6.3 Uu Interface TraceThis section describes how to trace all or some of the signaling messages over the Uu interface
of either specified cells or all the cells under an eNodeB. Traced messages can be automatically
or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
A maximum of five message tracing tasks can be created simultaneously over a Uu interface.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > LTE Services. Double-click Uu Interface Trace.
The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Uu Interface Trace dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 6-64.
Table 6-64 Parameters for message tracing over the Uu interface
Parameter Description
Direction Specifies the direction of messages to be traced over the Uu interface.
This parameter can be set to Bidirectional, From UE, or To UE.
Trace object Specifies the cell or cells to be traced. This parameter can be set to All
cells or Specified cell.
Local Cell ID Specifies the local cell ID. After a local cell ID is specified, the messages
related to the cell are traced.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when Trace object is set to Specified cell.
Message Type Specifies the message type. You can select one, multiple, or all message
types. If Select All is selected, all messages are traced. Otherwise, only
the selected types of messages are traced.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-65 describes the message tracing results.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
Page 132
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 132/254
Table 6-65 Results of message tracing over the Uu interface
Parameter Description
No. Indicates the sequence of the traced message that received by the LMT.
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
Standard
Interface
Message Type
Indicates the type of the standard interface message.
Trace Direction Indicates the message direction.
Cell ID Indicates the ID of the traced cell.
CPU ID Indicates the ID of the CPU to be traced CPU.
Call ID Indicates the ID of the traced call.
PLMN Indicates the message PLMN.
Content The version number traced over the Uu interface is 10Q1, and the traced
protocol layer is RRC. For details, see the 3GPP TS 36.331.
----End
6.6.4 IFTS Trace
This section describes how to trace the messages of a single UE in a specific cell and the statistical
result of data transfer on the user plane based on the causes for the RRC connection setup so
that abnormal UE procedures are detected. The UE messages to be traced include the control
plane messages over the S1, X2, and Uu interfaces. Traced messages can be automatically or
manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l The CPU usage of the board cannot be reported if IFTS tracing is enabled. Therefore, you
are advised to disable IFTS tracing before starting monitoring on the CPU usage of the board.
l Only one intelligent field test system (IFTS) message tracing task can be created in a cell.
After an IFTS message tracing task is started, the UE to be traced is the first UE that is
admitted by, is handed over to, or reestablishes connection with the cell.
NOTICEAfter the tracing task starts, lots of data will be reported, which may affect the system
performance. It is recommended that this task be used only in some special scenarios, such as
fault diagnosis.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
Page 133
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 133/254
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > LTE Services. Double-click IFTS Trace.
The IFTS Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the IFTS Trace dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 6-66.
Table 6-66 Parameters for IFTS message tracing
Parameter Description
Basi
c
Local Cell
ID
Specifies the ID of the local cell to be traced.
Main
eNodeB ID
Specifies the ID of the eNodeB serving the monitored cell to be traced.
Trace User
Type
Specifies the type of UEs to be traced. This parameter can be set to
HOIn User or RRCReEst User. If you select HOIn User, the UE
handed over to the cell is traced. If you select RRCReEst User, the
UE whose RRC connection is reestablished is traced.
Trace
Module
Specifies the module to be traced. This parameter can be set to L3,
L2, or L1. By default, no items are selected for Trace Module.
If L3 is selected, items on the L3 Trace Info tab page can be selected.
If L2 is selected, items on the L2 Trace Info tab page can be selected.
If L1 is selected, items on the L1 Trace Info tab page can be selected.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name,
and file type.
L3
Trac
e
Info
L3 Trace
Item
S1, Uu, and X2 can be selected.
L2
Trac
e
Info
L2 Trace
Item
MAC PDCCH, MAC SRI, MAC MCE, CQI, ACK , Access, Call
Drop&HO, Traffic, Voice, and Ping Delay can be selected.
L2 Trace
Extended
Item
Specifies the number of traced extended items. This parameter is user-
defined. The value can contain a maximum of 32 numbers, two
adjacent numbers of which are separated by a slash (/). Each number
must be 255 or less.
L1
Trac
e
Info
Direction This parameter can be set to Trace Both, Trace Sender, or Trace
Receiver.
L1 Trace
Item
L1, L1 UP, and L1 DOWN can be selected.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
Page 134
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 134/254
Parameter Description
L1 Trace
Extended
Item
Specifies the number of traced extended items. This parameter is user-
defined. The value can contain a maximum of 32 numbers, two
adjacent numbers of which are separated by a slash (/). Each number must be 255 or less.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-67 describes the message tracing results.
NOTE
For details, send the generated file to Huawei technical support for analysis.
Table 6-67 Results of IFTS message tracing
Parameter Description
No. Indicates the sequence of the traced message
that received by the LMT.
Time Indicates the time of the traced message.
Trace Interface Type Indicates the interface type of the traced
message.
Trace Message Type Indicates the type of the traced message.
Direction Indicates the direction of the traced message.
Sender CpuID Indicates the CPU ID of the sender.
CELL Instance Indicates the cell instance number of the
traced message.
Local CELLID Indicates the local cell ID of the traced
message.
eNBID Indicates the eNodeB ID of the traced
message.
PLMN Indicates the PLMN ID of the traced message.
S1 Interface ID Indicates the ID of the S1 interface over
which the traced message is reported. This
parameter is valid only when Trace
Interface Type is S1 Interface.
Message Report Module Indicates the module that reports the traced
message.
Reserved Indicates the message extension field.
UEID Indicates the UE ID of the traced message.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
Page 135
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 135/254
Parameter Description
Call ID Indicates the call ID of the traced message.
Chip ID Indicates the chip ID of the reported message.
Type Indicates the report type of the reported
message.
Physical Cell ID Indicates the physical cell ID of the reported
message.
Content Indicates the content of the reported message.
----End
6.6.5 M2 Interface Trace
This section describes how to trace control plane messages over the M2 interface. Traced
messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online
or offline. In addition, the traced messages can be resolved to display Information Elements
(IEs) contained in the messages.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
A maximum of five message tracing tasks can be created simultaneously over an M2 interface.
In addition, the tasks must differ in parameter settings.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > LTE Services. Double-click M2 Interface Trace.
The M2 Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the M2 Interface Trace dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 6-68.
Table 6-68 Parameters for message tracing over the M2 interface
Parameter
Description
Direction Specifies the direction of messages to be traced over the M2 interface. This
parameter can be set to Bi-Directional, To MCE, or From MCE.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
Page 136
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 136/254
Parameter
Description
Message
Type
Specifies the types of messages to be traced over the M2 interface. You can select
one, multiple, or all message types. If Select All is selected, all messages aretraced. Otherwise, only the selected types of messages are traced.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically saved.
Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-69 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-69 Results of message tracing over the M2 interface
Parameter
Description
Standard
Interface
Message
Type
Indicates the type of the standard interface message.
Trace
Direction
Indicates the message direction.
Content Indicates the message content.
----End
6.6.6 Se Interface Trace
This section describes how to trace control plane messages over the Se interface. Traced
messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online
or offline. In addition, the traced messages can be resolved to display Information Elements
(IEs) contained in the messages.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
A maximum of five message tracing tasks can be created simultaneously over an Se interface.
In addition, the tasks must differ in parameter settings.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
Page 137
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 137/254
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > LTE Services. Double-click Se Interface Trace.
The Se Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Se Interface Trace dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 6-70.
Table 6-70 Parameters for message tracing over the Se interface
Parameter
Description
Direction Specifies the direction of messages to be traced over the Se interface. This
parameter can be set to Bi-Directional, To ECO, or From ECO.
Protocol
Type
Specifies the protocol type of messages to be traced over the Se interface. This
parameter can be set to SCTP.
Message
Type
Specifies the types of messages to be traced over the Se interface. You can select
one, multiple, or all message types. If Select All is selected, all messages are
traced. Otherwise, only the selected types of messages are traced.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, tracing results will be automatically saved.
Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A message browsing window is displayed. Table 6-71 describes the message tracing results.
Table 6-71 Results of message tracing over the Se interface
Parameter
Description
Standard
Interface
Message
Type
Indicates the type of the standard interface message.
Trace
Direction
Indicates the message direction.
Content Indicates the message content.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 6 Managing Message Tracing
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
Page 138
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 138/254
7 Managing Performance Monitoring
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to perform real-time performance monitoring. Real-time
performance monitoring allows you to track the base station performance in real time.
7.1 Overview of Real-time Performance Monitoring
This section describes the functions of real-time perf ormance monitoring and the internal process
of real-time performance monitoring.
7.2 General O perations Related to Real-time Performance Monitoring
This section describes how to browse, edit, and save monitoring results.
7.3 Common Monitoring Tasks
This section describes the common monitoring tasks.
7.4 GSM-Specific Monitoring Tasks
This section describes GSM-specific monitoring tasks.
7.5 UMTS-specific Monitoring Tasks
This section describes UMTS-specific monitoring tasks.
7.6 LTE-specific Monitoring Tasks
This section describes LTE-specific monitoring tasks.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
Page 139
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 139/254
7.1 Overview of Real-time Performance Monitoring
This section describes the functions of real-time performance monitoring and the internal process
of real-time performance monitoring.
Functions of Common Monitoring
Common monitoring tasks are as follows:
l Transport Port Traffic Monitoring
l Transport Link Traffic Monitoring
l IP Performance Monitoring
l IPsec Performance Monitoring
l Local Pass-By Traffic Monitoring
l IP Clock Data Collection Monitoring
l Clock Quality Test Monitor
l CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring
l Board Temperature Monitoring
l RRU/RFU Output Power Monitoring
l Rx Frequency Scanning
l DTF Test
lFFT Frequency Scanning
l Board RTWP
l Antenna Radiation Pattern
l Transport OAM Monitoring
l Frequency Scanning Intermodulation Interference Detection
l Transport Auto Setup User Plane Monitoring
NOTE
l To use the monitoring function, you must install jre-6u26-windows-i586-p-s.
l The monitoring window is fixed in size and does not change with the web page.
A monitoring task is a monitoring instance, which consists of monitoring items, monitoring
objects, and monitoring parameters.
Real-time performance monitoring functions display monitoring results in lists and charts, which
enables you to monitor the running status of services and equipment.
You can analyze exceptions based on the monitoring results to maintain devices and rectify
faults.
GSM-specific monitoring tasks are as follows:
l Monitoring Offline Spectrum Scan
l Monitoring Online Spectrum Scan
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
Page 140
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 140/254
l Monitoring Voice Coding and Decoding
UMTS-specific monitoring tasks are as follows:
l HSPA Monitoring
l Cell Throughput Statistic
l Cell Service Resource Query
l Cell RTWP
l Frequency Scan Monitoring
LTE-specific monitoring tasks are as follows:
l Sector Performance Detect
l Cell Performance Monitoring
Internal Process of Real-time Performance Monitoring
The internal process of CPU usage monitoring is different from that of other real-time
performance monitoring functions.
Internal process of CPU usage monitoring
1. After a CPU usage monitoring task is created on the LMT, the LMT sends a binary CPU
usage query command to the maintenance module of the base station every other monitoring
period.
2. The maintenance module of the base station sends the command to the maintenance module
of a specified board.
3. The board collects and reports related data to the maintenance module of the base station.
4. The maintenance module of the base station forwards the data to the LMT.
Internal process of other real-time performance monitoring functions
l Creating a monitoring task on the LMT
1. After you create a monitoring task on the LMT, the LMT sends a binary command to
the base station to create the task.
2. The base station allocates an ID to the task and forwards the command to the
monitoring management module of a specified board.
3. After receiving the command, the monitoring management module informs the service
processing module of the command. Then, the service processing module starts
performance monitoring.
l Reporting monitoring results to the LMT
1. After performance monitoring is started, the service processing module reports
monitoring results to the LMT.
2. The LMT resolves the monitoring results and displays them in the window.
7.2 General Operations Related to Real-time PerformanceMonitoring
This section describes how to browse, edit, and save monitoring results.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
Page 141
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 141/254
7.2.1 Browsing Performance Monitoring Results Online
This section describes how to browse monitoring results in the real-time monitoring window
after a real-time performance monitoring task is started.
Prerequisites
l The real-time performance monitoring task has been started.
l Monitoring results are reported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the real-time monitoring window, click the List tab. Right-click on the List tab page and
choose Auto Scroll from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Click the Chart tab. Right-click on the Chart tab page and choose one of the following itemsfrom the shortcut menu:
l Auto Scroll
l Show Grid
l Switch Display Mode
l Auto Adjust
Step 3 Right-click in the task information pane at the bottom of the real-time monitoring window. Then,
choose List Detailed Task Info from the shortcut menu.
----End
7.2.2 Setting the Chart Display Mode
This section describes how to customize the appearance of a real-time monitoring window after
a monitoring task is created and started. At the bottom of the Chart tab page in the window, you
can set the display mode, such as the line color and line type.
Prerequisites
l The real-time performance monitoring task has been started.
l Monitoring results are reported.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Line Color or Line Type of a monitoring task at the bottom of the box.
Step 2 Select a value from the corresponding drop-down list.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
Page 142
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 142/254
NOTE
l The attributes of the chart display mode take effect only for the real-time monitoring window of the
existing monitoring task.
l During real-time performance monitoring, if data is displayed on the List tab page but no chart is
displayed on the Chart tab page, you can change the line color and line type.
l If the data reported for a monitoring task has two more types of units, the units are not displayed on
the Y axis. In this case, the units are displayed on the monitoring task attribute list at the bottom of the
real-time monitoring window. On the LMT, you can also manually set the Y axis display range so that
a figure for data items of different units can be displayed on the GUI. The procedure is detailed as
follows: Right-click in the chart display window, clear Auto Adjust. Then right-click the chart display
window, and select Set Y Axis Display Range > Both Axis. The Set Y Axis Display Range window
is displayed. Enter the maximum and minimum displayed values for the Y axis, and click OK .
l If a certain task at the bottom of the box cannot be selected and its attributes cannot be edited, this task
is displayed only on the List tab page rather than the Chart tab page or is saved in a file and can be
viewed in offline mode.
----End
7.2.3 Saving Performance Monitoring Results
This section describes how to save the monitoring results as files for future reference.
Context
The files are automatically saved in .csv or .mmf format.
ProcedureStep 1 When creating a monitoring task, select the Save File check box in the dialog box.
Step 2 Click ....
The Save dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the save folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Save.
The monitoring results are saved in the specified folder.
----End
7.2.4 Browsing Performance Monitoring Results Offline
This section describes how to browse the monitoring results offline to locate faults and obtain
historical information about the system running status.
Prerequisites
You have installed the Huawei maintenance and commissioning tool.
Monitoring results are saved as files in .csv or .mmf format.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
Page 143
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 143/254
Procedure
l To save monitoring results as files in .csv format, perform the following steps:
1. Open the folder containing the monitoring result files to obtain the real-time
performance monitoring file in .csv format.2. Double-click the file to open it and browse the file to obtain the required information.
l To save monitoring results as files in .mmf format, perform the following steps:
1. Choose Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal >
FreqChart FreqChartReview Tool.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a real-time performance monitoring file in .mmf format, and click Open.
The FreqChart FreqChartReview Tool dialog box is displayed.
3. View monitoring results.
----End
7.3 Common Monitoring Tasks
This section describes the common monitoring tasks.
7.3.1 Transport Port Traffic Monitoring
This section describes how to monitor the transport port traffic to obtain information about the
port bandwidth usage. The transmission/reception traffic rate and amount are monitored. The
ports to be monitored include MP, PPP, ETH, IMAGRP, UNI, FRAATM, ETHTRUNK,IMALINK, and TUNNEL ports.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
l A maximum of eight monitoring tasks of the same type can be started simultaneously on
a base station.
l If Protocol Type is set to IP, only one monitoring task can be started on a port.
l If Protocol Type is set to ATM, only one monitoring task can be started on a port with the
same unit. ATM related services are specific to UMTS.
l When Protocol Type is set to IP and Port Type is set to PHYSICAL_PORT, the
transmission and reception rates at different layer are calculated for IP ports depending on
the setting of Physical Port Type.
– If Physical Port Type is set to TUNNEL, transmission and reception rates at the
network layer are calculated for IP ports.
– If Physical Port Type is set to other values, transmission and reception rates at the link
layer are calculated for IP ports.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
Page 144
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 144/254
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click Transport Port
Traffic Monitoring.
The Transport Port Traffic Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Transport Port Traffic Monitoring dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Parameters for transport port traffic monitoring
Parameter Description
Protocol
Type
Specifies the protocol type. This parameter can be set to IP or ATM.
Cabinet No. Specifies the cabinet number of the board.
Subrack No. Specifies the subrack number of the board.
Slot No. Specifies the slot number of the board.
Subboard
Type
When Slot No. is set to 6 or 7, Subboard Type can be set to
BASE_BOARD, BACK_BOARD or ETH_COVERBOARD.
When Slot No. is set to other value, Subboard Type can be set to :
l E1_COVERBOARD or ETH_COVERBOARD if Protocol Type is set
to IP.
l E1_COVERBOARD or UNCHANNELLED_COVERBOARD if
Protocol Type is set to ATM.
Port Type l PHYSICAL_PORT
l RSCGRP
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
Page 145
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 145/254
Parameter Description
Physical
Port Type
l If Protocol Type is set to IP, this parameter can be set to:
– EthPort, EthTrunk , or BACKETH when Subboard Type is
ETH_COVERBOARD.
– PPP, MPGroup, or BACKETH when Subboard Type is
E1_COVERBOARD.
– PPP, MPGroup, EthPort, EthTrunk , or BACKETH when
Subboard Type is BASE_BOARD.
– PPP, or TUNNEL when Subboard Type is BACK_BOARD.
l If Protocol Type is set to ATM, this parameter can be set to:
– IMA, UNI, FRAATM, or IMALINK when Subboard Type is
E1_COVERBOARD.
– STM-1 when Subboard Type is UNCHANNELLED_COVER-
BOARD .
– IMA, UNI, FRAATM, or IMALINK when Subboard Type is
BASE_BOARD.
– UNI, FRAATM, or IMALINK when Subboard Type is
BACK_BOARD.
Port No. l IMA: 0 to 3
l UNI: 0 to 7
l FRAATM: 0 to 7
l IMALINK: 0 to 7
l PPP: 0 to 15
l MPGroup: 0 to 3
l STM-1: 0
l EthPort: 0 to 5
l EthTrunk: 0 to 2
l TUNNEL: 0 to 14
Unit l If Protocol Type is set to ATM, Unit can be set to cps or bps.
l If Protocol Type is set to IP, Unit cannot be set.
Report
Period (s)
Specifies the interval at which the monitoring results are reported. This
parameter is set to 1s and cannot be changed.
Include IP
Discard
Packet's
Information
This parameter is valid only when Protocol Type is set to IP.
When this parameter is selected, the RX and the TX Packet Discard Rate on
the IP layer is exported in the monitoring result. The unit of Packet Discard
Rate is ‰.
Include Link
Discard
Packet's
Information
This parameter is valid only when Protocol Type is set to IP.
When this parameter is selected, the RX and the TX Packet Discard Rate on
the link layer is exported in the monitoring result. The unit of Packet Discard
Rate is ‰.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
Page 146
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 146/254
Parameter Description
Monitor
Type
This parameter can be set to Flow Stat or Load Stat.This parameter is valid
only when Port Type is set to RSCGRP.
Resource
Group No.
The number of resource group. Value range: 0 to 15. This parameter is valid
only when Port Type is set to RSCGRP.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the transport port flux
stat monitoring results on the Chart or List tab page.
NOTE
In the monitoring results, the IP-layer reception packet loss rate and transmission packet loss rate indicate the
reception and transmission packet loss rates over the Versatile IP and Security Platform (VISP) protocol stack
on the internal modules of the base station. The packets are discarded due to invalid IP headers, packet reassembly
failures, or processing failures for selected IP options.
----End
7.3.2 Transport Link Traffic Monitoring
This section describes how to monitor the transport link traffic. You can monitor the traffic of
each data flow from or to the base station to obtain information about the bandwidth usage by
each service.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
l ATM related services are specific to UMTS.
Context
l A maximum of eight transport link flux stat monitoring tasks can be started simultaneously
on a base station.
l If Protocol Type is set to IP, only one monitoring task can be started on a link.
l If Protocol Type is set to ATM, only one monitoring task can be started on a link with the
same unit. ATM related services are specific to UMTS.
l In an asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) link flux stat monitoring task, a maximum of six
PVCs can be started for the monitoring. This task is specific to UMTS.
l In an IP link flux stat monitoring task, a maximum of six flows (one OM flow, two SCTP
flows, and three IP path flows) can be started for the monitoring.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
Page 147
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 147/254
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click Transport Link
Traffic Monitoring.
The Transport Link Traffic Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Transport Link Traffic Monitoring dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 7-2.
Table 7-2 Parameters for transport link traffic monitoring
Parameter Description
Protocol Type Specifies the protocol type. This parameter can be set to IP or ATM.
Cabinet No. Specifies the cabinet number of the board.
Subrack No. Specifies the subrack number of the board.
Slot No. Specifies the slot number of the board.
Subboard Type This parameter is valid when Protocol Type is set to ATM.
When Slot No. is set to 6, or 7, this parameter can be set to
BASE_BOARD or BACK_BOARD.
When Slot No. is set to other value, this parameter can be set to
UNCHANNELLED_COVERBOARD or E1_COVERBOARD.
Physical Port
Type
This parameter is valid when Protocol Type is set to ATM. It can be set
to:
STM-1 if Subboard Type is set to UNCHANNELLED_COVER-
BOARD.
IMAGRP, UNI, or FRAATM if Subboard Type is set to
E1_COVERBOARD.
IMAGRP, UNI or FRAATM if Subboard Type is set to
BASE_BOARD.
UNI or FRAATM if Subboard Type is set to BACK_BOARD.
Port No. This parameter is valid when Protocol Type is set to ATM.
l When Subboard Type is set to UNCHANNELLED_COVER-
BOARD, this parameter can be set to:
– 0 if Physical Port Type is set to STM-1
l When Subboard Type is set to E1_COVERBOARD, this parameter
can be set to:
– 0 or 3 if Physical Port Type is set to IMAGRP
– 0 to 7 if Physical Port Type is set to UNI
– 0 to 7 if Physical Port Type is set to FRAATM
Unit If Protocol Type is set to ATM, Unit can be set to cps or bps.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
Page 148
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 148/254
Parameter Description
Report Period Specifies the interval at which the monitoring results are reported. This
parameter is set to 1s and cannot be changed.
ATM
Parameter
You can select a maximum of six PVCs.
OM(TCP) If Protocol Type is set to IP, OM(TCP) can be set.
Local IP If Protocol Type is set to IP, this parameter specifies the local IP address.
Remote IP If Protocol Type is set to IP, this parameter specifies the peer IP address.
DSCP If Protocol Type is set to IP, this parameter specifies the differentiated
services code point. The value range is from 0 to 63,or 255.
Include IPPM
Statistic
If Protocol Type is set to IP, only one IPPM statistics task is supported.
IPPath If Protocol Type is set to IP, a maximum of three IP paths are supported.
SCTP If Protocol Type is set to IP, a maximum of two SCTP links are supported.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file
type.
Step 4 Click Submit.A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the transport link flux
stat monitoring results on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.3 IP Performance Monitoring
This section describes how to monitor the IP link performance.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
The IP layer traffic amount and quality of each board are monitored.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2In the navigation tree, choose Monitor >Common Monitoring. Double-click IP Performance
Monitoring.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
Page 149
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 149/254
The IP Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the IP Performance Monitoring dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 7-3.
Table 7-3 Parameters for IP performance monitoring
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for IP online
performance monitoring is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for IP online
performance monitoring is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for IP online performance
monitoring is located.
VRF Specifies the ID of the virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance for IP
online performance monitoring is located.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file
type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the IP performance
monitoring results on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.4 IPsec Performance Monitoring
This section describes how to monitor the IPsec traffic over the transmission security output port
on the base station.
Prerequisites
lYou have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
l The IPsec tunnel has been configured on the transmission output port of the base station.
Context
The transmit rate, receive rate, and packet loss rate during reception in an IPsec tunnel are
calculated on each board.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
Page 150
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 150/254
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring, and double-click IPsec
Performance Monitoring.
The IPsec Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the IPsec Performance Monitoring dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-4.
Table 7-4 Parameters for IPsec Performance Monitoring
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for IPsec performance
monitoring is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for IPsec performance
monitoring is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for IPsec performance
monitoring is located.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file
type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the IPsec performance
monitoring results on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.5 Local Pass-By Traffic Monitoring
This section describes how to monitor the local traffic volume of a base station and the volume
of traffic forwarded by the base station. The monitoring result helps determine the traffic volume
of the base station and the proportion of forwarded traffic so that the proportion is appropriate.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
l Local traffic and passby traffic constitute the total traffic of a base station.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click Local Pass-By
Traffic Monitoring.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
Page 151
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 151/254
The Local Pass-By Traffic Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Local Pass-By Traffic Monitoring dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 7-5.
Table 7-5 Parameters for local and pass-by traffic monitoring
Parameter
Description
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view traffic monitoringresults on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.6 IP Clock Data Collection Monitoring
This section describes how to collect IP clock data to obtain information about IP packet jitter.
The data to be collected includes frequency discrimination data and phase discrimination data.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
The pRRU3901 does not support this function.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click IP Clock DataCollection Monitoring.
The IP Clock Data Collection Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the IP Clock Data Collection Monitoring dialog box. For details
about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-6.
Table 7-6 Parameters for IP clock data collection
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for IP clock data
collection is located.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
Page 152
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 152/254
Parameter Description
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for IP clock data
collection is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for IP clock data collection
is located.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.7 Clock Quality Test Monitor
This task describes how to monitor the clock quality. The reference clock quality is crucial for
the system operation. If the clock module generates an alarm, the alarm must be promptly
handled. You can test the reference clock first. A clock test does not affect the system or services.
Prerequisites
l The reference clock for the base station has been set.
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
l The pRRU3901 does not support this function.
l IP clock quality monitoring is not supported.
l The period for reporting phase discrimination is 1s.
l In normal situations, the value of the phase discrimination falls within the range from -10
to +10. In abnormal situations where excessive frequency deviation occurs, the value of phase discrimination falls within the range from -128 to +127.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click Clock Quality
Test Monitor.
The Clock Quality Test Monitor dialog box is displayed.
Step 3Set related parameters in the Clock Quality Test Monitor dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 7-7.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
Page 153
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 153/254
Table 7-7 Parameters for clock quality monitoring
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Indicates the cabinet number of the board.
Subrack No. Indicates the subrack number of the board.
Slot No. Indicates the slot number of the board.
Test Type Including:
l Frequency Discrimination
l Phase Discrimination
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.8 CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring
This task describes how to monitor the CPU/DSP usage of the base station to obtain information
about system resource usage.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
The reference CPU usage is as follows:
l When the base station is running normally and not carrying services, the CPU usage of a
board is about 5% to 10%.
l When the base station is carrying services, the CPU usage of a board increases to a level
lower than 75%. If the usage exceeds 75%, an alarm is generated.
l It is normal that the CPU usage reaches 100% for a short time.
l If the base station is not carrying services and the CPU usage is 100% for more than 1
minute, the CPU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click CPU/DSP Usage
Monitoring.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
Page 154
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 154/254
The CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 7-8.
Table 7-8 Parameters for CPU/DSP usage monitoring
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for CPU/DSP usage
monitoring is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for CPU/DSP usage
monitoring is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for CPU/DSP usage
monitoring is located.
Monitor
Period (s)
Specifies the interval at which the LMT delivers the query command.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file
type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the CPU/DSP usage
monitoring results on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.9 Board Temperature Monitoring
This section describes how to monitor the temperatures of a board and the power amplifier in
the board.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
After a board temperature monitoring task is started, the system reports the detected temperatures
of the WMPT, UMPT, LMPT, UTRP, WRFU, RRU, and power amplifiers in the WMPT,
UMPT, LMPT, UTRP, WRFU, and RRU at specified intervals. When the working temperature
of a power amplifier exceeds the normal range, an alarm will be reported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
Page 155
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 155/254
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click Board
Temperature Monitoring.
The Board Temperature Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Board Temperature Monitoring dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-9.
The Board Temperature Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Table 7-9 Parameters for board temperature monitoring
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for temperature
monitoring is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for temperaturemonitoring is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for temperature monitoring
is located.
Monitor
Period (ms)
This parameter can be set to 1000, 2000, or 3000.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the board temperature
monitoring results on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.10 RRU/RFU Output Power Monitoring
This section describes how to monitor the output power, including the typical output power and
output power of each carrier.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
l After an output power monitoring task is started, the system reports the detected typical
output power and output power of each carrier at specified intervals.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
Page 156
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 156/254
NOTE
l The output power of a base station is related to the configuration and services.
l When the RF module reports an invalid value for the output power, N/A is displayed on the list tab
page and the figure table page is not displayed.
l Table 7-10 lists the pilot power and typical power of the MTRU, RRU, WRFU, and
pRRU3901.
Table 7-10 Power configuration table
Board Pilot Power (dBm) Typical Power (dBm)
MTRU 33 43
RRU 33 43
WRFU 33 43
pRRU3901 1 carrier 13 1 carrier 23
2 carriers 10 2 carriers 20
l When the base station is not carrying services, the difference between the output power
and pilot power of a WRFU or RRU is 3 dBm. If the output power is much lower than the
pilot power, the output power is abnormal.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click RRU/RFU
Output Power Monitoring.
The RRU/RFU Output Power Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the RRU/RFU Output Power Monitoring dialog box. For details
about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-11.
Table 7-11 Parameters for RRU/RFU output power monitoring
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the WRFU or RRU is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the WRFU or RRU is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the WRFU or RRU is located.
Monitor
Period (ms)
This parameter can be set to 1000, 2000, or 3000.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file
type.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
Page 157
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 157/254
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the RRU/RFU output
power monitoring results on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.11 Rx Frequency Scanning
This section describes how to perform RX frequency scan. Uplink frequency scan helps to check
the electromagnetic environment around a base station and detects internal interference in the
base station. The RRU or WRFU scans its frequency or frequencies, calculates the received
signal strength, and reports the calculation result. You are advised to perform the scan before
configuring the cell.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
l Before you start an uplink frequency scan task, block the corresponding board.
Context
l This task is specific only to UMTS.
l This task cannot be performed on RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929, RRU3942,
RRU3936, pRRU3901, WRFUd, MRFUd, WRFUe, and MRFUe.l The following are reference results of uplink frequency scan:
– If the antenna is disconnected and the scan result shows a sharp increase reaching a
value greater than -108 dBm, there is internal interference in the base station.
– There is external interference to the base station if the scan result shows a sharp increase
greater than -105 dBm under the following conditions: (1) The antenna is connected
and the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is turned on. (2) The radio channel attenuation
has been properly set to compensate for TMA gains and feeder loss.
– The increase varies with interference characteristics:
– If the increase appears in the shape of a triangle or trapezoid, the monophony
interference occurs and the peak indicates the center frequency of the interference.
– If the increase appears in the shape of a rectangle or overlaps with a rectangle,
wideband interference occurs and the center of the rectangle indicates the interfering
frequency.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click Rx Frequency
Scanning.
The Rx Frequency Scanning dialog box is displayed.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
Page 158
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 158/254
Step 3 Set related parameters in the RX Frequency Scanning dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 7-12.
Table 7-12 Parameters for RX frequency Scanning
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the cabinet number of the WRFU or RRU.
Subrack No. Specifies the subrack number of the WRFU or RRU.
Slot No. Specifies the slot number of the WRFU or RRU.
Start RF
Frequency
(200kHz)
Specifies the start frequency.
End RF
Frequency
(200kHz)
Specifies the end frequency.
Scanning
Frequency
Inteval
(200kHz)
Value range: 1 to 25.
Scanning
Time Inteval
(0.1s)
Value range: 2 to 600.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file
type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the scan results on the
Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.12 DTF TestThis section describes how to monitor the distance to fault (DTF).
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
l This task is used to locate the connection faults between the RRU/RFU and the antenna in
the following scenarios:
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
Page 159
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 159/254
– A voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) alarm is generated. In this situation, you can
perform this task on a specified transmit channel of the RRU or RFU that reported the
alarm on the local or remote maintenance terminal. This task cannot be created on the
U2000.
–In routine maintenance, a VSWR exception is detected on the local or remotemaintenance terminal. In this situation, you can perform this task to further locate the
fault. The U2000 does not support this task.
l The DTF test monitoring-enabled RF module can be the RRU3926, RRU3936, RRU3826,
RRU3824, MRFU V2a, RRU3838, RRU3832, or RRU3839.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree of the Monitor window, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring.
Double-click DTF Test.The DTF Test dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the DTF Test dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions, see
Table 7-13.
Table 7-13 Parameters for a DTF test
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the cabinet number of the RRU or RFU.
Subrack No. Specifies the subrack number of the RRU or RFU.
Slot No. Specifies the slot number of the RRU or RFU.
TX Channel No. Specifies the transmit channel number of the RRU or RFU.
Cable Type Specifies the feeder model. This parameter can be set to 1/4 Cable, 3/8
Cable, 1/2 Cable, 5/8 Cable, 7/8 Cable, 7/8 Low-loss Cable, 11/4
Cable, 15/8 Cable, or Ideal Transmission Line.
Display Range Of
Feeder Test
Results(m)
Specifies the feeder length (measuring from the cabinet top).
NOTE
When the base station uses the unit of metric system, this field is valid.
Start Frequency
(0.1MHZ)
Specifies the low frequency of the external filter.
NOTE
If no external filter is installed, use the default value of this parameter. The default
value is 0.
Stop Frequency
(0.1MHZ)
Specifies the high frequency of the external filter.
NOTE
If no external filter is installed, use the default value of this parameter. The default
value is 65535.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
Page 160
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 160/254
Parameter Description
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.13 FFT Frequency Scan
This section describes how to check the spectrum status. You can check interference in the
frequency and time domains by analyzing the sampled spectrum and power distribution.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
l GSM does not support FFT frequency scan monitoring.
l To perform offline FFT frequency scan, deactivate related cells or carriers. For a co-MPT base station, deactivate the cells or carriers for different systems. If the GBTS serves only
one cell, deactivate the cell as follows:
– On the BSC, deactivate the GBTS.
– On the GBTS, run the RST APP command to deactivate applications. This operation
does not affect ongoing services and has no impact on other systems.
l The RRU3801C does not support this function.
l The RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806 and WRFU support wideband offline frequency
scanning. They do not support high-resolution online frequency scanning or wideband
online frequency scanning.
l High-resolution online frequency scanning scans cell frequencies in current use for interference, including a small number of frequency sidebands. Wideband online frequency
scanning scans a continuous frequency spectrum within a certain range, including all
frequencies in current use and the frequency spectrum between the frequencies. Wideband
offline frequency scanning scans offline an entire frequency spectrum that an RF can work
on.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring, and double-click FFT
Frequency Scan.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
Page 161
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 161/254
The FFT Frequency Scan dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the FFT Frequency Scan dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 7-14.
Table 7-14 Parameters for FFT frequency scan
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board for FFT frequency
scan is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board for FFT frequency
scan is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board for FFT frequency scan
is located.
Scan Mode Specifies the scan mode in which signals on a carrier or receive (RX)
channel are monitored for interference identification. This parameter can
be set to High-Resolution Online Frequency, Broadband Online
Frequency, or Broadband Offline Frequency.
l High-resolution Online Frequency: An online carrier-level scan.
Signals in specified channels are scanned for all established cells on
a carrier of a specified radio access technology (RAT).
l Broadband Online Frequency: An online channel-level scan.
Signals in specified channels are scanned for all established cells.
l Broadband Offline Frequency: An offline channel-level scan.
Signals in specified channels within the bandwidth of the duplexer arescanned.
RBW(KHZ) Specifies the time frequency to perform the FFT frequency scan.
l High-Resolution Online Frequency:
Value range: 15 to 200. Default value: 100.As stipulated by protocols,
the minimum accuracy is 100 kHz. You are advised to retain the
default value 100 kHz for this parameter.
l Broadband Online Frequency and Broadband Offline Frequency:
Value range: 100 to 5000. Default value: 200.
Index of RX
Channel 1
Specifies RX channel 1 where signals are scanned.
Index of RX
Channel 2
Specifies RX channel 2 where signals are scanned.
Mode You can select WCDMA, LTE-TDD, or LTE-FDD.
NOTE
When it's a UMTS single-mode base station, this field is unavailable on the WebUI.
This parameter is set to WCDMA by default.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
Page 162
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 162/254
Parameter Description
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the FFT frequency
scanning results on the Chart tab page.
----End
7.3.14 Board RTWP
This section describes how to measure the received total wideband power (RTWP) of a UTRAN
uplink channel. Based on the RTWP, the uplink radio channel can be adjusted. This task does
not affect services.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
ContextThis function is available only to the UMTS and supports the RF modules only in UMTS mode.
The following are reference results of board-level RTWP monitoring:
l If the antenna is disconnected or the board is not loaded, the RTWP is about -108 dBm.
l If the antenna is connected and the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is turned on, or the
board is loaded, the RTWP is about -105 dBm.
l The RTWP value varies depending on the pRRU3901 deployment scenarios.
– By default, the RTWP is -102 dBm.
–If the sector equipment groups in a cell have different numbers of pRRU3901s, theRTWP will increase by up to 12 dBm.
Compared with the RTWP when no service is running, the RTWP increases about 6 dB when
services are running normally and the uplink load reaches 75%.
NOTE
l A normal curve is displayed if the reported board-level RTWP is valid. The vertical axis shows the
measurement value and the unit is 0.1 dBm.
l An abnormal curve is displayed if the reported board-level RTWP is invalid. The RTWP measurement results
of the receive channels An and Bn are at the level of -1200, that is, -120 dBm. The problem may be that the
RF module is disconnected or cannot be detected, or the RF channels are faulty. You need to locate and
rectify the problem.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
Page 163
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 163/254
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click Board RTWP.
The Board RTWP dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Board RTWP dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions,
see Table 7-15.
Table 7-15 Parameters for board-level RTWP monitoring
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the cabinet number of the RRU or RFU.
Subrack No. Specifies the subrack number of the RRU or RFU.
Slot No. Specifies the slot number of the RRU or RFU.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file
type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring resultson the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.15 Antenna Radiation Pattern
This section describes how to view the horizontal and vertical directed graph of the active antenna
system (AAS) in polar coordinates system based on the data received from the RU module.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
The active antenna system (AAS) sends the LMT 360 values about radiation intensity from both
horizontal and vertical directions. The LMT generates a polar diagram in both horizontal and
vertical directions based on the values.
NOTE
Only the AAS supports this function. The remote radio unit (RRU) and radio frequency unit (RFU) do notsupport this function.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
Page 164
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 164/254
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring, and double-click Antenna
Radiation Pattern.
The Antenna Radiation Pattern dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Antenna Radiation Pattern dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 7-16.
Table 7-16 Parameters for antenna radiation pattern querying
Parameter Description
AARU Cabinet
No.
Specifies the cabinet number of the active antenna radio unit.
AARU
Subrack No.
Specifies the subrack number of active antenna radio unit.
AARU Slot
No.
Specifies the slot number of the active antenna radio unit.
Frequency Specifies the frequency of a carrier, which is measured in the unit of 100
kHz. Uplink or downlink data transmitted on an RU module can be
determined based on frequencies.
Antenna Port
No.
Specifies the port No. of the virtual antenna.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file
type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the AAS monitoring
results on the Chart tab page.
----End
7.3.16 Transport OAM Monitoring
This section describes how to monitor the transport network quality based on the Y1731-LM
and Y1731-DM sessions.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
l The Y1731-LM and Y1731-DM sessions have been configured.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
Page 165
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 165/254
Context
l The packet loss rate, delay, and jitter transport network are calculated based on the Y1731-
LM and Y1731-DM sessions.
l The ETHDM and ETHLM functions have been enabled and are running correctly. If the
NodeB experiences a power-off reset or an upgrade, the two functions will be unavailable.
The two functions need to be reactivated.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring, and double-click Transport
OAM Monitoring.
The Transport OAM Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Transport OAM Monitoring dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 7-17.
Table 7-17 Parameters for Transport OAM Monitoring
Parameter Description
Test Type You can select Y1731-LM or Y1731-DM.
NOTE
l If this parameter is set to Y1731-LM, packet loss rate of Y.1731 is monitored.
l If this parameter is set to Y1731-DM, delay and jitter of Y.1731 is monitored.
Session ID Specifies the ID of the Y1731-LM and Y1731-DM sessions.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file
type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the OAM monitoring
results on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.17 Frequency Scanning Intermodulation Interference Detection
This section describes how to monitor frequency scanning intermodulation interference
detection. During intermodulation interference detection, all frequencies within the transmit
frequency band are traversed on a frequency step basis. The test results are represented in
diagrams.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
Page 166
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 166/254
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
l No major alarm is generated in the radio frequency (RF) module corresponding to the
antenna port.
l The start and end frequencies to be detected must within the frequency bands supported by
the RF module.
Context
l Services on the RRU, on which frequency scanning intermodulation interference detection
is performed, are interrupted.
l The frequency scanning intermodulation interference performs intermodulation test on
frequencies based on the specified frequency range and frequency step and the capability
of radio frequency (RF) modules.
l RF modules that support this feature include RRU3942, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3828,
RRU3829, RRU3926, RRU3928, RRU3929, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3838, RRU3221,
RRU3229, RRU3240, and RRU3268.
l The detection results (also called intermodulation products (IMPs)) are displayed in a figure
or list. In a figure, IMPs of different orders are indicated by colored lines. In a list, all
detection results are displayed, including detailed results of each channel, involving
multiple pairs of test frequencies.
l You can check whether IMPs are normal by observing the curves in a figure. For example,
if the 5-order IMP threshold is 145 dB (dBc), check the curve corresponding to the 5-order
IMP. If a part of values on the Y-axis of the curve corresponding to the 5-order IMP are
below 145 dB (dBc), the 5-order IMP is abnormal. If all values on the Y-axis are above
145 dB (dBc), the 5-order IMP is normal.
lBy default, the 3-order IMP threshold, 5-order IMP threshold, and 7- or a higher order IMPthreshold are 132 dB (dBc), 142 dB (dBc), and 145 dB (dBc), respectively. The thresholds
can be adjusted as required.
l You can also view detailed detection results in a list or export the detection results for
further analysis.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring, and double-click Frequency
Scanning Intermodulation Interference Detection.
The Frequency Scanning Intermodulation Interference Detection dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Frequency Scanning Intermodulation Interference Detection
dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-18.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
Page 167
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 167/254
Table 7-18 Parameters for frequency scanning intermodulation interference detection
monitoring
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the RRU under frequencyscanning intermodulation interference detection monitoring is
configured.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the RRU under frequency
scanning intermodulation interference detection monitoring is
configured.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the RRU under frequency scanning
intermodulation interference detection monitoring is configured.
TX Channel No. Specifies the number of the transmit channel in the RRU.
Start Freq
(0.1MHz)
Specifies the start transmit frequency in frequency scanning
intermodulation interference.
NOTE
If this parameter is not specified, a value is automatically assigned based on module
types.
End Freq
(0.1MHz)
Specifies the end transmit frequency in frequency scanning
intermodulation interference.
NOTE
If this parameter is not specified, a value is automatically assigned based on module
types.
Freq Step(0.1MHz)
Specifies the transmit frequency step in frequency scanningintermodulation interference.
NOTE
If this parameter is not specified, a value is automatically assigned based on module
types.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the frequency scanning
intermodulation interference detection monitoring results on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.18 Transport Auto Setup User Plane Monitoring
This section describes how to monitor the performance of user plane in transport interface self-
setup scenarios.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
Page 168
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 168/254
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
l IPPM Flag can be set to User Plane Link or User Plane Link + IPPM. If IPPM Flag is
set to User Plane Link + IPPM, the values of the IP PM parameters, including Average
RTT Delay, Transmit Time Jitter, Receive Packet Discard Rate, Receive Time
Jitter, Transmit lost packet, and Transmit packet, are reported.
l If quadbit-based IP PM is used and IPPM Flag is set to User Plane Link + IPPM,
DSCP must be specified.
l If IPPM Flag is set to User Plane Link + IPPM and the DSCP value is specified, the
values of the parameters Recieve Rate (pps), Transmit Rate (pps), Recieve Rate (bps)
and Transmit Rate (bps) are not reported. The parameters Recieve Rate (pps), TransmitRate (pps), Recieve Rate (bps) and Transmit Rate (bps) are set to 0 by default.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor >Common Monitoring. Double-click Transport Auto
Setup User Plane Monitoring.
The Transport Auto Setup User Plane Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Transport Auto Setup User Plane Monitoring dialog box. For
details about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-19.
Table 7-19 Parameters for transport auto setup user plane monitoring
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Indicates the cabinet number of the board for transport interface self-setup.
Subrack No. Indicates the subrack number of the board for transport interface self-setup.
Slot No. Indicates the slot number of the board for transport interface self-setup.
IPPM Flag Indicates whether IP performance monitoring (PM) results need to be
reported. This parameter can be set to User Plane Link or User Plane Link
+ IPPM.
VRF Indicates the ID of the virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance for
transport interface self-setup.
Source IP Indicates the local IP address for transport interface self-setup.
Destination IP Indicates the destination IP address for transport interface self-setup.
DSCP Indicates the DSCP. This parameter is valid only when IPPM Flag is set
to User Plane Link + IPPM.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
Page 169
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 169/254
Parameter Description
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the transport auto setup
user plane monitoring results on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.3.19 DTP Test
This section describes how to check the distance to PIM (DPIM) test results. The DTP test is
used to locate a passive intermodulation (PIM) fault of the antenna system.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
When the antenna system experiences a PIM fault, users can locate the fault point based on the
DTP test results, which eliminates the need of repeated tower climbing for fault point location
and therefore reduces the maintenance cost.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree of the Monitor window, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring.
Double-click DTP Test.
The DTP Test dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the DTF Test dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions, seeTable 7-20.
Table 7-20 Parameters for a DTP test
Parameter Description
Test Type This parameter can be set to only offline.
Cabinet No. Specifies the cabinet number of the RRU or RFU.
Subrack No. Specifies the subrack number of the RRU or RFU.
Slot No. Specifies the slot number of the RRU or RFU.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
Page 170
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 170/254
Parameter Description
Tx No. Specifies the transmitter number of the RRU or RFU.
Cable Type Specifies the feeder model. This parameter can be set to 1/4 Cable, 3/8
Cable, 1/2 Cable, 5/8 Cable, 7/8 Cable, 7/8 Low-loss Cable, 11/4
Cable, 15/8 Cable, or Ideal Transmission Line.
Cable Length Specifies the feeder length (measuring from the cabinet top).
Start
Frequency
Specifies the start frequency for a DTP test. The default value is 0.
Stop
Frequency
Specifies the stop frequency for a DTP test. The default value is 65535.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and filetype.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.4 GSM-Specific Monitoring TasksThis section describes GSM-specific monitoring tasks.
7.4.1 Monitoring Offline Spectrum Scan
This section describes how to monitor the spectrum scan of a specific band in a carrier in the
cell. Based on received signal strength indicator (RSSI) values reported to the base station, a
frequency spectrum graph is generated. You can log in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT)
and remotely obtain the frequency spectrum graph to preliminarily troubleshoot the interference
during interference localization.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
l This test cannot be performed together with any of the following tests, including the online
spectrum scan, CDMA interference network test, online and offline passive
intermodulation test, and TRX RF self-loopback test. You must stop these tests before
monitoring offline spectrum scan.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
Page 171
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 171/254
Context
l Only one offline spectrum scan test can be performed at a time in a cell, and a maximum
of eight test tasks can be started at the same time for one base station.
l
The offline spectrum scan consists of the channel-level spectrum scan and carrier-levelspectrum scan. When the spectrum of a channel is scanned, channels of all carriers in the
same cell with the same timeslot number as that of the channel are blocked, and the carrier
carrying the channel is also blocked. When the spectrum of the carrier is scanned, all carriers
in the same cell except the active BCCH carrier are blocked.
l The maximum spectrum can be scanned each time does not exceed 25 MHz.
l In a carrier-level spectrum scan test, the carrier to be scanned must be a non-active-BCCH
carrier. In a channel-level specturm scan test, the number of the channel to be scanned
cannot be the same as the number of the active BCCH, CCCH, and CBCH. If the cell has
an SDCCH, the number of the channel to be scanned cannot be the same as the number of
the SDCCH because the SDCCH does not support the scan.
l The frequency band to be scanned cannot exceed the frequency band supported by the
carrier.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > GSM Monitoring. Double-click Offline Spectrum
Scan Monitoring.
The Offline Spectrum Scan Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Offline Spectrum Scan Monitoring dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 7-21.
Table 7-21 Parameters for offline spectrum scan monitoring
Parameter Description
Test Type Channel Type Test or Trx Type Test can be selected.
Local Cell ID Specifies the ID of the local cell. This parameter uniquely specifies a local
cell in a base station.
TRX ID Specifies the index of the carrier to be tested. This parameter uniquelyspecifies a carrier under a BSC.
Channel No. Specifies the number of the channel to be tested.
Duration
(Minute)
Specifies the duration of the test.
Begin
Frequency
(0.1M)
Specifies the lowest frequency in the test.
End Frequency
(0.1M)
Specifies the highest frequency in the test.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
Page 172
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 172/254
Parameter Description
Show Working
Frequency
If you select the Show Working Frequency check box, the working
frequencies scanned in the test will be automatically queried and you can
view the working frequencies on the Chart or List tab page.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.4.2 Monitoring Online Spectrum Scan
This section describes how to monitor the online spectrum of a carrier in the cell. Based on
received signal strength indicator (RSSI) values reported to the base station, a frequency
spectrum graph is generated. You can log in to the local maintenance terminal (LMT) and
remotely obtain the frequency spectrum graph to preliminarily troubleshoot the interference
during interference localization.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
l This test cannot be performed together with any of the following tests, including the offline
spectrum scan, CDMA interference network test, online and offline passive
intermodulation test, and TRX RF self-loopback test. You must stop these tests before
monitoring online spectrum scan.
Context
l Only one online spectrum scan test can be performed at a time in a cell, and a maximum
of eight test tasks can be started at the same time for one base station.
l During the test, the specified test channel is blocked.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > GSM Monitoring. Double-click Online Spectrum
Scan Monitoring.
The Online Spectrum Scan Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3Set related parameters in the Online Spectrum Scan Monitoring dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 7-22.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
Page 173
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 173/254
Table 7-22 Parameters for Online Spectrum Scan Monitoring
Parameter Description
Local Cell ID Specifies the ID of the local cell. This parameter uniquely specifies a local
cell in a base station.
TRX ID Specifies the index of the carrier to be tested. This parameter uniquely
specifies a carrier under a BSC.
Channel No. Specifies the number of the channel to be tested.
Duration
(Minute)
Specifies the duration of the test.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.4.3 Monitoring Voice Coding and Decoding
This section describes how to perform a voice test, and record the uplink signal noise ratio (SNR),downlink frame type, and DTX indicator during the test. The test results are recorded in and can
be obtained from the operation and maintenance link (OML) messages and received signal level
(RSL) messages.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > GSM Monitoring. Double-click Codec Mode Test.
The Codec Mode Test dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Codec Mode Test dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 7-23.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
Page 174
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 174/254
Table 7-23 Parameters for voice coding and decoding
Parameter Description
Local Cell Specifies the ID of the local cell. This parameter uniquely specifies a local
cell in a base station.
TRX ID Specifies the index of the carrier to be tested. This parameter uniquely
specifies a carrier under a BSC.
Channel Specifies the number of the channel in a carrier.
Sub-channel Specifies the number of the subchannel.
Duration Specifies the duration of the test.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.5 UMTS-specific Monitoring Tasks
This section describes UMTS-specific monitoring tasks.
7.5.1 HSPA Monitoring
This section describes how to monitor the single-user High Speed Packet Access (HSPA)
performance. Based on the monitoring results, you can efficiently commission the HSPA rate
by modifying parameters or adjust the UE location. This task includes High Speed Uplink Packet
Access (HSUPA) monitoring and High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) monitoring.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
l Only one HSUPA and HSDPA monitoring task of the same UE can be started on a base
station.
l HSUPA monitoring and HSDPA monitoring can be simultaneously performed.
l This function can be used to quickly locate and resolve problems. Normally there is no way
to avoid that some user data such as International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) will
be used during the troubleshooting. However, this function provides an anonymous data
processing method.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
Page 175
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 175/254
l You are obligated to take considerable measures, in compliance with the laws of the
countries concerned, to ensure that the personal data of users is fully protected. For example,
you can enable user identity anonymity and delete the tracing files after the problems are
handled.
l When entering IMSI, check whether IMSI data to be entered must be anonymous byrunning the LST USERIDANONSWITCH command and querying User Identity
Anonymity Switch.
– If User Identity Anonymity Switch is ON, anonymous IMSI data needs to be entered
in IMSI. Anonymous IMSI data can be obtained by entering the IMSI and a key in the
anonymization tool HMACUtil.
– If User Identity Anonymity Switch is OFF, the IMSI can be directly entered in
IMSI.
NOTE
l The anonymization switch and the key can be modified on the U2000 by choosing Monitor >
Signaling Trace > Anonymous Policy Management (traditional style), or by choosing Signaling
Trace > Anonymous Policy Management (application style). For details, see U2000 Fault
Management User Guide.
l If you change the anonymous policy or cipher key of a started monitoring task, you need to restart the
monitoring task. Otherwise, the monitoring task becomes invalid.
l To obtain the anonymization tool HMACUtil, contact Huawei technical support.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring. Double-click HSPAMonitoring.
The HSPA Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the related parameters. For details about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-24.
Table 7-24 Parameters for single-user HSPA monitoring
Parameter Description
IMSI Specifies the IMSI for HSPA monitoring.
Report Type This parameter can be set to HSUPA or HSDPA.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
Page 176
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 176/254
7.5.2 Measuring Sector Equipment Group RTWP
This section describes how to measure the received total wideband power (RTWP) of a UTRAN
uplink channel. Based on the RTWP, the uplink radio channel can be adjusted. This task does
not affect services.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
l RTWP measurement results for sector equipment groups are reported only when logic cells
exist.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring. Double-click Sector Equipment
Group RTWP.
The Sector Equipment Group RTWP dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the related parameters. For details about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-25.
Table 7-25 Parameters for sector equipment group RTWP monitoring
Parameter Description
Logic Cell ID Specifies the ID of the logic cell to be monitored.
Sector
Equipment
Group Index
Specifies the index of the sector equipment group.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.5.3 Cell Throughput Statistic
This section describes how to monitor uplink and downlink throughput of a cell. Based on the
monitoring results, you can know the distribution of users in the cell.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
Page 177
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 177/254
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring. Double-click Cell Throughput
Statistic.
The Cell Throughput Statistic dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the related parameters. For details about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-26.
Table 7-26 Parameters for cell throughput statistic
Parameter Description
Local Cell ID Specifies the ID of the local cell.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.5.4 Cell Service Resource Query
This section describes how to query service resources of a cell, including the number of users,
the number of channel elements (CEs) used in the uplink, and the number of CEs used in the
downlink.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
l A logical cell has been set up.
Context
l Uplink resources include uplink demodulation resources and decoding resources. The unit
is number.
l Downlink resources include downlink demodulation resources and decoding resources.
The unit is number.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
Page 178
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 178/254
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring. Double-click Cell Service
Resource Query.
The Cell Service Resource Query dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the related parameters. For details about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-27.
Table 7-27 Parameters for querying cell service resources
Parameter Description
Local Cell ID Specifies the ID of the local cell.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file
type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the query results on
the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.5.5 Cell RTWP
This section describes how to measure the received total wideband power (RTWP) of a UTRAN
uplink channel. Based on the RTWP, the uplink radio channel can be adjusted. This task does
not affect services.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring. Double-click Cell RTWP.
The Cell RTWP dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the related parameters. For details about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-28.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
Page 179
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 179/254
Table 7-28 Parameters for cell-level RTWP monitoring
Parameter Description
Logic Cell ID Specifies the ID of the cell to be monitored.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and
file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.5.6 Frequency Scan Monitoring
By analyzing the spectral and power distribution of sampled data, you can monitor the
interference in the frequency and time domains in radio environments.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
l If a logical cell has been activated, the frequency must be consistent with the uplink
frequency configured for the logical cell.
l If a logical cell does not exist or is not activated, the start frequency and end frequency
must be within the frequency band supported by the RRU.
l Interference detection is performed on RF modules. To perform NodeB offline interference
detection on a SDR-based RF module of a multi-mode base station, perform the following
steps:
– For a GSM+UMTS (GU) base station
1. On the NodeB, run the BLK BRD command to block the RF module.
2. On the BSC, run the DEA BTS command to deactivate the base station on the
GSM side.
3. Wait 30 minutes and perform NodeB offline interference detection.
– For a UMTS+LTE (UL) base station
1. On the NodeB, run the BLK BRD command to block the RF module.
2. On the eNodeB, run the DEA CELL command to deactivate the base station on
the GSM side.
3. Perform NodeB offline interference detection.
– For a GSM+UMTS+LTE (GUL) base station
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
Page 180
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 180/254
1. On the NodeB, run the BLK BRD command to block the RF module.
2. On the BSC, run the DEA BTS command to deactivate the base station on the
GSM side.
3. On the eNodeB, run the DEA CELL command to deactivate the base station on
the GSM side.
4. Wait 30 minutes and perform NodeB offline interference detection.
After NodeB offline interference detection is performed, unblock the RF module and
activate the cell and base station.
l Only the RF modules RRU3804, RRU3806, RRU3801E, RRU3808, and WRFU support
this function. Spectrum scanning is recommended for the modules that do not support this
function.
l Monitoring frequency scan require that the FTP server be used to upload files from the base
station. Therefore, this operation is available when you log in to the base station using the
LMT rather than the U2000 proxy.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring. Double-click Frequency Scan
Monitoring.
The Frequency Scan Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the related parameters. For details about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-29.
Table 7-29 Parameters for monitoring frequency scan
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the cabinet number of the RRU or RFU.
Subrack No. Specifies the subrack number of the RRU or RFU.
Slot No. Specifies the slot number of the RRU or RFU.
Band Band 1 to Band 9 can be selected.
Start Frequency No. Start frequency number for the detection.
End Frequency No. End frequency number for the detection.
Start Freq(MHz) Start frequency that the system automatically calculates according to
the start frequency No.
End Freq(MHz) End frequency that the system automatically calculates according to
the end frequency No.
Module Type
[Compensator]
Module type for the detection
FTP File Path Path to the directory where the sampling files are saved. Two
sampling files are downloaded each time.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
Page 181
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 181/254
Parameter Description
FTPServer IP
Address
Specifies the IP address of the LMT PC.
FTPServer User FTPServer user name.
User Password FTPServer password. The default password is hwbs@com.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
In the Chart, the horizontal axis represents the frequency (MHz), and the vertical axis represents
the amplitude (dBm).
NOTE
l The detection result can have an acceptable error within ±5 dB.
l You can select Show Power Graph to open a window that shows the power data in a graph. In the graph,
the horizontal axis represents the relative time (ms), and the vertical axis represents the amplitude (dBm).
----End
7.6 LTE-specific Monitoring Tasks
This section describes LTE-specific monitoring tasks.
7.6.1 Sector Performance Detect
This section describes how to monitor the sector performance by performing a uplink frequency
scan. In a frequency scan, the frequency information is scanned to detect interference. An uplink
frequency scan is used to detect uplink interference.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
l The cell in the monitored sector must be in the non-activated state.
Context
A Task ID on the List tab page in the monitoring window represents a point for one frame shown
on the monitoring figure on the Chart tab page. Each point indicates the signal strength for a
specified frequency. Task ID displayed in the task information pane at the bottom of the real-
time monitoring window indicates the running task of the frame.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
Page 182
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 182/254
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > LTE Monitoring. Double-click Sector Performance
Detect.
The Sector Performance Detect dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Sector Performance Detect dialog box. For details about parameter descriptions, see Table 7-30.
Table 7-30 Parameters for sector performance monitoring
Parameter Description
Monitor Item It can be set to UL Widefreq Scan.
Monitor Period
(ms)
Specifies the interval at which monitoring results are reported. This
parameter can be set to 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, or 2000.
Sector Equipment ID
Specifies the sector ID.
Frequency
Band
Specifies the frequency band supported by the sector.
UL EARFCN Specifies the uplink EARFCN of a cell.
NOTE
The uplink EARFCN must fall in the frequency range supported by the RRU that
serves the sector. If this parameter is set to an EARFCN beyond the frequency range,
the monitoring will fail.
UL Bandwidth Specifies the uplink bandwidth of the cell. This parameter can be set to
1.4M, 3M, 5M, 10M, 15M, or 20M.
NOTE
l pRRU3901 only support 5M, 10M, 15M, 20M.
l The uplink bandwidth must fall in the frequency range supported by the RRU that
serves the sector. If this parameter is set to a bandwidth beyond the frequency
range, the monitoring will fail.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be
automatically saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file
type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the monitoring results
on the Chart or List tab page.
----End
7.6.2 Cell Performance Monitoring
This section describes how to monitor common measurement values and the number of users
over common channels.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
Page 183
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 183/254
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Monitor.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > LTE Monitoring. Double-click Cell Performance
Monitoring.
The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 7-31.
Table 7-31 Parameters for cell performance monitoring
Parameter Description
Monitor Item This parameter can be set to Detect Interference, General Throughout,
User Statistics, or MA Scheduling Statistic.
NOTE
l If there is a local cell. The frequency to be checked must be the uplink frequency
of the local cell.
l If there is not a local cell, the start frequency number and end frequency number
must be in one frequency band.
Main
eNodeB ID
Specifies the main eNodeB ID.
Monitor
Period (ms)
Specifies the interval at which monitoring results are reported. This parameter
can be set to 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, or 2000.
Local Cell ID Specifies the ID of a local cell. The cell ID ranges from 0 to 35.
Save File If you select the Save File check box, monitoring results will be automatically
saved. Click to customize the folder, file name, and file type.
Step 4 Click Submit.
A real-time performance monitoring window is displayed. You can view the cell performance
monitoring results on the Chart or List tab page.
NOTE
In the cell performance monitoring results, the values of the RRU Cabinet No., RRU Subrack No., and
RRU Slot No. parameters under the Interference Detect item are displayed as the actual values when the
SFN or cell combination feature is enabled and displayed as N/A in other scenarios.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 7 Managing Performance Monitoring
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
Page 184
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 184/254
8 Maintaining the Base Station
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to manage software and files and maintain base station equipment.
8.1 Device Panel Operations
This section describes the operations of the BTS device panel, including how to start and use it
to maintain the base station.
8.2 Common Maintenance Tasks
This section describes how to manage software and f iles and use the IP transfer self-test function.
Managing software and files involves upgrading the software and data configuration file using
the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server.
8.3 Maintaining the GSM Base Station
This section describes how to maintain the cells and carriers of a GSM base station.
8.4 Maintaining the LTE Base Station
This section describes how to check whether the eNodeB is installed correctly.
8.5 Maintenance
This section describes how to maintain base station equipment.
8.6 BTS Self -test
This section describes how to use the base station self-test function. The base station self-test
function helps check the version of the base station software, running status of cells and RRUs,and alarms.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
Page 185
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 185/254
8.1 Device Panel Operations
This section describes the operations of the BTS device panel, including how to start and use it
to maintain the base station.
8.1.1 Introduction to the Device Panel
Man-machine language (MML) commands and graphical device panels can be used on the local
maintenance terminal (LMT) to maintain devices.
Context
A device panel is a graphical user interface (GUI) that shows components of a base station.
Procedure
Step 1 On the device panel, you can right-click an installed board and perform related operations.
Figure 8-1 and Table 8-1 show a device panel and parameters on the device panel.
Figure 8-1 Interface of a device panel
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
Page 186
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 186/254
NOTE
l The device panel automatically refreshes with the board status of the base station. Device panels vary with
the base station type and configuration.
l The board maintenance menu varies with the board type.
l Overflow Information: Due to the no restrictions on component configurations, the cabinet configuration
may be beyond the capability of the cabinet panel. To avoid GUI element display in disorder, a table is
provided to display detailed overflow information when the cabinet configuration may be beyond the
capability of the cabinet panel. For example, right-click the gray area in area 2 and the Overflow
Information item is displayed. If Overflow Information is not gray, click Overflow Information and a
table will be displayed to show the detailed overflow information.
Table 8-1 Parameters on the device panel
No. Parameter Description
1 Legend A color is used to indicate the status of each board.
2 Device Panel Based on information reported by the base station, the
device panel displays the boards configured in the cabinet
and the real-time status of each board. On the device
panel, you can perform board-specific operations.
----End
8.1.2 Starting the Device Panel
This section describes how to start the device panel to maintain installed boards.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
Before operating and managing a base station, you must start the device panel.
ProcedureStep 1 In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
Step 2 In the device maintenance navigation tree, double-click the BTS under Cabinet, and the
corresponding BTS device panel is displayed in the Device Panel tab page on the right.
Step 3 Right-click a board and choose a maintenance item.
----End
8.1.3 Querying the Board Version Information
This section describes how to query the board version information of a base station.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
Page 187
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 187/254
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
ContextYou can check whether the current version of a board matches that of the base station based on
the query result. The version information about a board includes the cabinet number, subrack
number, slot number, CPU number, software version, hardware version, and the BootROM
version.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. Start the device panel of the base station.
2. On the device panel, right-click a board and choose Display Board Version
Information. A Display Board Version Information dialog box is displayed,
showing the board version information.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the DSP BRDVER command.
----End
8.1.4 Listing Active Alarms
This section describes how to list active alarms about a board.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. Start the device panel of the base station.
2. On the device panel, right-click a board and choose List Active Alarms.
A List Active Alarms dialog box is displayed, showing the active alarms about the
board.l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the LST ALMAF command.
----End
8.1.5 Resetting a Board
This section describes how to reset a faulty board.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
Page 188
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 188/254
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. Start the device panel of the base station.
2. On the device panel, right-click a board and choose Reset Board.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK .
NOTE
l The result will be displayed and the color indicating the board status will be updated accordingly.
l The UPEU and USCU cannot be reset.
l The reset interrupts the services on the board.
l The reset board cannot be used before it is reinitialized.
l
If you reset the active main control board, the base station is reset.l The common device of a dual-mode base station can be reset. However, the reset interrupts
services on the common device and therefore affects the services of the peer mode.
l If a base station is configured with multi-mode radio frequency (RF) modules, the reset of the
RF modules interrupts the services of the peer modes.
l If a base station works in CPRI MUX mode and one mode is the convergence end, the reset of
the baseband board providing the convergence function or the main control board of this mode
interrupts services of the peer modes.
l If a multimode base station supports co-transmission and the shared ports for co-transmission
are located on a board working in UMTS mode, the reset of the board interrupts services of the
peer modes.
l If a multimode base station supports co-transmission and the shared ports for co-transmission
are located on a board working in LTE mode, the reset of the board interrupts services of the
peer modes.
l The reset of a multi-mode RF module of a multimode base station interrupts the services of the
peer modes. The reset of UMPT, LMPT, WMPT, or UTRP interrupts the services of the peer
modes.
l The reset of an uninstalled board fails.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the RST BRD command.
----End
8.1.6 Querying the Current Version Information of the Base Station
This section describes how to query the current version information about the base station.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
The version information includes the current software version, and software version status.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
Page 189
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 189/254
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. Start the device panel of the base station.
2. On the device panel, right-click the active board and choose List Current SoftwareVersion.
A dialog box is displayed, showing the current version information about the base
station.
NOTE
This step applies to the active main control board (including WMPT, UMPT, or LMPT board) of a
base station.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the LST VER command.
----End
8.1.7 Blocking a Board
This section describes how to block a board to maintain the board without affecting services.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
A BBP, RRU, RFU, RXU, UBRI, or GTMU can be blocked.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. Start the device panel of the base station.
2. On the device panel, right-click a board and choose Block Board.
A Confirm dialog box is displayed.
3. In the Confirm dialog box, click OK .
NOTE
l The result will be displayed and the color indicating the board status will be updated accordingly.
l After a board is blocked, the resources of the board are unavailable logically.
l After a BBP, RRU, or RFU is blocked, if links cannot be set up for the associated RRUs or RFUs
or links cannot work at the highest CPRI line rate, you need to run the STR CPRILBRNEG
command to initiate a negotiation.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the BLK BRD command.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
Page 190
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 190/254
8.1.8 Unblocking a Board
This section describes how to unblock a board to maintain the board without affecting services.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
A BBP, RRU, RFU, and RXU can be unblocked.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. Start the device panel of the base station.
2. On the device panel, right-click a board and choose Unblock Board.
A Confirm dialog box is displayed.
3. In the Confirm dialog box, click OK .
NOTE
l The result will be displayed and the color indicating the board status will be updated accordingly.
l If a board is functional, the resources of the board are available logically after it is unblocked.
l After a BBP, RRU, or RFU is unblocked, if links cannot be set up for the associated RRUs or
RFUs or links cannot work at the highest CPRI line rate, you need to run the STR
CPRILBRNEG command to initiate a negotiation.
l A board can be unblocked for a consecutive number of times.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the UBL BRD command.
----End
8.1.9 Querying the Clock Status
This section describes how to query the current clock status of a base station.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
By checking the running status and modification settings of the clock, you can maintain and
adjust the clock status.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. Start the device panel of the base station.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
Page 191
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 191/254
2. On the device panel, right-click a board and choose Display Clock Status.
A Display Clock Status dialog box is displayed, showing the clock information.
NOTE
You can maintain the clock based on the query result of the base station clock status, clock reference
status, clock working mode, and clock synchronization mode.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the DSP CLKSTAT command.
----End
8.1.10 Querying the Board Status
This section describes how to query the board status of a base station.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. Start the device panel of the base station.
2. On the device panel, right-click a board and choose Display Board Status.
The Display Board Status dialog box is displayed, showing the current status of the
board.
– Table 8-2 lists the board status.
Table 8-2 Board status
Status Type Description
Management Indicates the administrative state of the board.
Active or
standby
A board is either in the active status or in the standby status.
Functionality Indicates the operational state of the board.
Alarms Alarms indicate alarms of the highest class on the board.
Availability Availability indicates the physical status of a board.
– By checking the board status, you can know about the running status of a base
station.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the DSP BRD command.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
Page 192
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 192/254
8.1.11 Querying the Software Version of the Base Station
This section describes how to query the software version of a macro or distributed base station.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
The software version information includes the storage position, software version, and software
version status.
Procedure
lGraphical user interface (GUI) mode1. Start the device panel of the base station.
2. On the device panel, right-click a board and choose List Software Version.
The List Software Version dialog box is displayed, showing the software version
information and patch version information.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the LST SOFTWARE command.
----End
8.1.12 Querying the CPU/DSP Usage
This section describes how to query the central processing unit (CPU) and digital signal
processor (DSP) usage of a base station.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
By checking the usage of all CPUs and digital signal processors (DSPs) on a specified board,
you can determine whether the system is overloaded.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. Start the device panel of the base station.
2. On the device panel, right-click a board and choose Display CPU/DSP Occupancy.
The Display CPU/DSP Occupancy dialog box is displayed, showing the CPU and
DSP usage of the board.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
Page 193
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 193/254
Run the DSP CPUUSAGE command.
----End
8.1.13 Querying the Manufacturing Information of a BoardThis section describes how to query the manufacturing information of a board.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l The manufacturing formation about a board includes the board type, bar code, description,
manufacturing date, manufacturer, and version number.
l Only the baseband unit (BBU) has backplane manufacturing information. To query the backplane manufacturing information, the slot number 255 must be specified.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. Start the device panel of the base station.
2. On the device panel, right-click a board and choose Display Board Manufacturing
Information.
The Display Board Manufacturing Information dialog box is displayed, showing
the board manufacturing information.l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the DSP BRDMFRINFO command.
----End
8.1.14 Querying the E1/T1 Port Status
This section describes how to query the E1 or T1 port status.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l If base station cascading mode does not match the E1 or T1 clock mode, the link running
status may be reported as abnormal.
l In T1 clock mode, if the frame format is T1 superframe, the physical loopback status cannot
be correctly detected.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
Page 194
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 194/254
1. Start the device panel of the base station.
2. On the device panel, right-click a board and choose Display E1T1 Port Status.
The Display E1T1 Port Status dialog box is displayed, showing the E1 or T1 port
status.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the DSP E1T1 command.
----End
8.2 Common Maintenance Tasks
This section describes how to manage software and files and use the IP transfer self-test function.
Managing software and files involves upgrading the software and data configuration file using
the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server.
8.2.1 Concepts Related to Software and Files
This section describes software and file types, and methods of obtaining files.
Software Types
There are different types of software.
l BootROM
All the boards on the base station is equipped with the BootROM. The BootROM refers tothe software bound with hardware. It provides basic device drive function and can be started
and updated manually.
The BootROM is a re-writable storage medium, which is used to store binary data, that is,
the machine codes.
l BTS software
The BTS software is the version software of a base station.
l Cold patch
The BTS cold patch is also known as the patch. It can upgrade a specific board or module
to improve functions or to fix some problems.
l Hot patch
The hot patch is also known as the online patch. It supports the upgrade without disrupting
the system operation and rectify some function defects.
File Types
There are different types of files, and operations on the files vary with the types.
l Data configuration file
A data configuration file contains parameter settings for each module of the base station.
This file is an .xml file. You can upload and download the file.
l Maintenance and operation log
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
Page 195
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 195/254
A maintenance and operation log file records the information about the maintenance and
operation of the base station.
This file is a text file. You can upload the file.
l Main control log
A main control log file is a collection of logs including the original, commissioning, or user
alarm log, running log, call log, cell log, maintenance log, and operation log.
This file is a binary file. You can upload the file.
l Board log
A board log file is a collection of logs including the log of active and standby central
processing unit (CPU) breakdown, the detailed breakdown log, and the digital signal
processor (DSP) memory log.
This file is a binary file. You can upload the file.
NOTE
Board log files vary with boards because some boards do not have a standby CPU and other boards do nothave a DSP.
l Routine received total wideband power (RTWP) test log
After a routine RTWP test is started, the system keeps a real-time RTWP log.
This file is a binary file. You can upload the file.
l Device archive file
A device archive file records information about each board of the BTS such as the
manufacturing information and running time.
This file is an .xml file. You can upload the file.
Methods of Obtaining the Files
After obtaining a file, you can browse it.
There are two methods of obtaining and browsing a file:
l You can upload a file to the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server and log in to the FTP server
to browse the file.
l You can browse an operation log file on the U2000 client.
8.2.2 Configuring the FTP Server
You can download the base station software, data configuration file, and license from an File
Transfer Protocol (FTP) server to the local maintenance terminal (LMT).
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The FTP server has been configured.
Context
Because the base station software, data configuration file, and license are downloaded from the
FTP server, ensure that the FTP server has been configured before the download.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
Page 196
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 196/254
Procedure
Step 1 Download the FTP server software. (Optional. Perform this step only when there is no FTP
server at the LMT computer.)
1. In the upper right corner of the LMT main window, click FTP Tool. The File Download-Security Warning dialog box is displayed.
2. Click Save to save the FTP server software SFTPServer.exe to the LMT computer.
Step 2 Double-click SFTPServer.exe. SFTPServer.exe is decompressed into an SFTPServer folder.
Step 3 Open SFTPServer. Double-click SFTPServer.exe to start the FTP server. The icon is
displayed on the right side of the taskbar after the FTP server is started.
l If the FTP server runs for the first time, go to Step 4.
l Otherwise, go to Step 5.
Step 4 If the FTP server starts for the first time, an FTP password config dialog box is prompted,indicating to modify the password of the FTP server, as shown in Figure 8-2. In the dialog box,
enter the initial password hwbs@com, and enter and confirm the new password. Then, click
OK .
Figure 8-2 FTP password config dialog box
Step 5 Configure the FTP server.
1. Double-click . The FTP server configuration dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 8-3.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
Page 197
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 197/254
Figure 8-3 FTP server configuration dialog box
2. Set User name, Password, Working directory, the default user name is admin. Set
Working directory to the root directory of the FTP server, which is D:\FTP, and retain
default values for other parameters.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
Page 198
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 198/254
NOTE
l The user name, password, and other parameters displayed in the FTP server configuration
dialog box can be modified as required.
l The method for modifying the password of the FTP server is as follows: Enter a new password
in Password and click OK . The FTP password authentication dialog box is displayed. InFTP password authentication, enter the old password and the new password that needs to
be authenticated, and then click OK . The password is successfully modified and the new
password takes effect.
l The method for modifying the FTP user name and other parameters displayed in the FTP
server configuration dialog box is as follows: Enter the changed value in the text boxes of
parameters and click OK . The FTP password authentication dialog box is displayed. In
the FTP password authentication dialog box, enter the valid password and click OK . The
parameters are successfully modified.
l If you forget the password of the FTP server, delete the FTP server applications, and then
download and reinstall them. Then, the user name and password of the FTP server are restored
to the default ones.
l Working directory must be set to a specified path for storing software and data configurationfiles because the FTP server cannot access the files not stored in Working directory.
l Plain text indicates that data is transmitted in plaintext format. Encrypted indicates that data is
transmitted in ciphertext format. Both indicates data can be transmitted in the format of plaintext
or ciphertext as required.
l Click SSL Settings, and configure parameters used for data encryption and transmission using
the FTP server on the displayed SSL Settings dialog box. These parameters include Root
Certificate FIle Name, Certificate FIle Name, Private Key File Name, and Private Key
Password. Ensure that the root certificate file, certificate file, and private key file must be stored
in the same directory as SFTPServer.exe.
l During an upgrade of the LMT, if LmtView Common component under Select Software
Components is selected, the password of the FTP tool is restored to the default password
hwbs@com after an upgrade.
l If the running FTP tool is SingleRAN V100R007C00, NodeB V200R015C00, LTE
V100R005C01, or an earlier version, the changes on the parameters of the FTP server take effect,
without entering the password.
l To implement data or file transfer between the FTP server and base station, you must log in to
the base station using the LMT, not the remote U2000 proxy.
3. Click OK . The FTP server is successfully configured.
----End
8.2.3 Downloading and Activating the Software and Data
Configuration File
To add functions or correct defects during base station operation, you may need to upgrade the
version software, install the license file, or activate the data configuration file.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The FTP server has been configured.
l The FTP server is running properly. The IP address of the FTP server is on the same network
segment as the IP address of the base station, and the FTP server is properly connected to
the base station.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
Page 199
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 199/254
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the base station.
l The user of the FTP server has the permission to read files in specified paths.
Context
The base station software consists of the version software, license file, and data configuration
file.
NOTICE
If the base station resets, all services carried on the base station are interrupted.
l The license file applies only to LTE.
l Downloading and activating the data configuration file do not cause the base station toreset. The updated configuration data automatically takes effect next time the base station
restarts.
l Installing the license file does not cause the base station to restart. The license file takes
effect immediately after the installation.
l After the version software is successfully activated, the base station automatically restarts.
NOTE
l In special scenarios such as base station deployment or upgrade, select the Download version software
check box and set Delay Download Flag to Yes (Delay download) to reduce the time required. In delay
download mode, only the minimum LMT package is downloaded, and the complete LMT package can be
automatically downloaded about four hours later. This mode has no impact on the base station software. If
the functions of the complete LMT package are required before the complete package is automatically
downloaded, you can run the SPL SOFTWARE command to download the complete package to the base
station.
l If the Install license check box is selected and Force flag is set to Yes, the license file is forcibly installed
despite of any errors. If Force flag is set to No, which is recommended, error information is displayed during
the license file installation. For details, see the section "Troubleshooting" in License Management Feature
Parameter Description.
Procedure
l GUI mode
1. In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
2. In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > Common Maintenance >
Software Management. Double-click Software Management.
The Software Management tab page is displayed.
– Figure 8-4 shows the directory structure of the software package.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
Page 200
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 200/254
Figure 8-4 Directory structure of the software package
– Figure 8-4 shows the directory structure of the software package of a multimode
base station. To download the version software of a single-mode base station, youonly need to download a single-mode software package, for example, BTS3900
V100R00xCxxSPCxxx_NodeB.
– To download the BootROM, configuration data file, and license file, choose the
folder where the the BootROM, configuration data file, and license file are saved.
3. Set parameters related to FTP Server Configuration on the Software
Management tab page. Table 8-3 lists the parameters that need to be set.
Table 8-3 FTP Server Configuration
Parameter Description
IP address Specifies the IP address of the LMT PC.
The IP address must be on the same
network segment as the IP address of the
base station.
User name Specifies the user name for logging in to
the FTP server.
NOTE
The value of this parameter must be the same
as that of User name in Configuring the
FTP Server.
Password Specifies the password for logging in to
the FTP server.
NOTE
The value of this parameter must be the same
as that of Password in Configuring the
FTP Server.
4. Select tasks based on scenarios. Table 8-4 describes the scenarios and corresponding
tasks.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
Page 201
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 201/254
Table 8-4 Scenarios and corresponding tasks
Scenario Recommended Task
Only version software upgrade is
required. The data configuration file doesnot need to be downloaded and activated,
and the license file does not need to be
installed.
Download version software and
Activate version software
Version software upgrade and license file
installation are required. The data
configuration file does not need to be
downloaded and activated.
Download version software, Install
license, and Activate version
software
Version software upgrade and data
configuration file download and
activation are required. The license filedoes not need to be installed.
Download version software,
Download configuration file,
Activate configuration file, andActivate version software
Version software upgrade, data
configuration file download and
activation, and license file installation are
required.
All
Only license file installation is required. Install license
Only BootRom upgrade is required. Upgrade BootRom
Only supply software upgrade is required. Supply software
Only cold patch upgrade is required. Upgrade Patch
Only hot patch upgrade is required. Upgrade Hot Patch
Version software upgrade, data
configuration file download and
activation, and license file installation are
required.
Upgrade
Only board activate is required. Activate Board
5. Click Execute. The base station performs the selected tasks from top to bottom as
required. The operation results are displayed in Information.
NOTE
l If all tasks are selected, the base station performs the tasks one by one. A progress bar is displayed
under Execute to indicate the progress of each task.
l If a check box is not selected, the base station skips this task and proceeds with the next task.
l If a task fails, the base station stops this task and following tasks.
l If the base station software is successfully activated, the base station automatically restarts and
the new software takes effect.
l If the base station software fails to be activated, the base station rolls back to the source version.
6. Clear Clear Message to clear all contents displayed in Information.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
Page 202
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 202/254
l MML mode
1. Run the DLD SOFTWARE command to download the software and BootRom.
2. Run the DLD CFGFILE command to download the configuration file.
3. Run the ACT CFGFILE command to activate the configuration file. If EFT is set toAFTER_RESET, the operation takes effect only after the base station resets. In this
case, software activation by running the ACT SOFTWARE command fails before
the base station resets.
4. Run the ACT SOFTWARE command to activate the software and BootRom.
5. Run the INS LICENSE command to download and install the license file.
----End
8.2.4 Extra Configuration File Transfer
This section describes how to download the BTS extra configuration file from the FTP server to the base station. The downloaded extra configuration files take effect after activating.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server has been configured.
l The FTP server is running properly. The IP address of the FTP server is on the same network
segment as the IP address of the base station, and the FTP server is properly connected to
the base station.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the base station.
l The user of the FTP server has the permission to read files in specified paths.
Context
l Downloading the extra configuration file requires that the FTP server be used to download
files to the base station. Therefore, this operation is available when you log in to the base
station using the LMT rather than the U2000 proxy.
l The extra configuration files downloaded using the LMT can be in plaintext or encrypted
format. If the extra configuration files are encrypted, enter the encryption password to
download them.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > Common Maintenance. Double-click
Extra Configuration File Transfer.
The Extra Configuration File Transfer tab page is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters on the Extra Configuration File Transfer tab page. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 8-5.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
Page 203
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 203/254
Table 8-5 Parameter description
Parameter Description
FTP Server
IP
Specifies the IP address of the LMT PC. The IP address must be on the same
network segment as the IP address of the base station.
User Name Specifies the user name for logging in to the FTP server.
Password Specifies the password for logging in to the FTP server.The default password
is hwbs@com.
Destination
File Name
Specifies the local batch configuration file.
NOTE
If the extra configuration file is encrypted, click Browse. The Encrypt Password dialog
box is displayed for you to enter the encryption password.
Step 4 Click Activate or Preactivate. The operation results are displayed in Information.
NOTE
To enable the configuration data to take effect on the base station, click Activate. To only check the correctness
of the configuration data, click Preactivate.
Step 5 Clear Clear Message to clear all contents displayed in Information.
----End
8.2.5 Device Archive Transfer
This section describes how to generate a BTS device archive file and upload the BTS devicearchive file to the FTP server.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The FTP server has been configured.
l The FTP server is running properly. The IP address of the FTP server is on the same network
segment as the IP address of the base station, and the FTP server is properly connected to
the base station.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the base station.
l The user of the FTP server has the permission to read files in specified paths.
Context
Transferring the device archive file requires that the FTP server be used to upload and download
files to and from the base station. Therefore, this operation is available when you log in to the
base station using the LMT rather than the U2000 proxy.
Procedure
l GUI mode
1. In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
Page 204
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 204/254
2. In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance >Common Maintenance. Double-
click Device Archive Transfer.
The Device Archive Transfer tab page is displayed.
3. Set related parameters on the Device Archive Transfer tab page. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 8-6.
Table 8-6 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
FTP
Server IP
Specifies the IP address of the computer used as the LMT. The IP
address must be on the same network segment as the IP address of the
base station.
User
Name
Specifies the user name for logging in to the FTP server.
Password Specifies the password for logging in to the FTP server. The default
password is hwbs@com.
Destinatio
n File
Name
Specifies the file to be uploaded to the FTP server.
Transfer
Type
Specifies the transfer type. This parameter can be set to Export Device
File or Upload Device File.
If this parameter is set to Export Device File, a device archive file is
generated on the base station. If this parameter is set to Upload Device
File, the generated device archive file is uploaded to the FTP server.
Transfer
Status
A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of file transfer.
4. Click Start.
l MML mode
1. Run the EXP DEVFILE command to generate the device archive file.
2. Run the ULD DEVFILE command to upload the file from the base station to the FTP
server.
----End
8.2.6 Data Configuration File Transfer
This section describes how to download the data configuration file from the File Transfer
Protocol (FTP) server to the base station, or upload the data configuration file from the base
station to the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. The downloaded data configuration file takes
effect after the base station restarts.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
Page 205
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 205/254
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The FTP server has been configured.
l The FTP server is running properly. The IP address of the FTP server is on the same network segment as the IP address of the base station, and the FTP server is properly connected to
the base station.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the base station.
l The user of the FTP server has the permission to read files in specified paths.
Context
Transferring the data configuration file requires that the FTP server be used to upload and
download files to and from the base station. Therefore, this operation is available when you log
in to the base station using the LMT rather than the U2000 proxy.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
2. In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance >Common Maintenance. Double-
click Data Configuration File Transfer.
The Data Configuration File Transfer tab page is displayed.
3. Set related parameters on the Data Configuration File Transfer tab page. For details
about parameter descriptions, see Table 8-7.
Table 8-7 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
FTP
Server IP
Specifies the IP address of the computer used as the LMT. The IP
address must be on the same network segment as the IP address of the
base station.
User
Name
Specifies the user name for logging in to the FTP server.
Password Specifies the password for logging in to the FTP server. The default
password is hwbs@com.
File Path Specifies the folder of the file to be uploaded or downloaded.
Transfer
Type
Specifies the transfer type. This parameter can be set to Upload (Site
to FTP server), Download (FTP server to site), Make data
configuration file take effect, Reset immediately, or Reset later.
Transfer
Status
A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of file transfer.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
Page 206
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 206/254
4. Click Start.
l Man-machine language (MML) mode
1. Run the ULD CFGFILE command to upload the file from the base station to the FTP
server.
2. Run the DLD CFGFILE command to download the file from the FTP server to the
base station.
3. Run the ACT CFGFILE command to activate the data configuration file.
----End
8.2.7 Other File Transfer
This section describes how to upload base station files to the FTP server. After the base station
files are uploaded, you can save, browse, and modify the files.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The FTP server has been configured.
l The FTP server is running properly. The IP address of the FTP server is on the same network
segment as the IP address of the base station, and the FTP server is properly connected to
the base station.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the base station.
l The user of the FTP server has the permission to read files in specified paths.
Context
Uploading other files require that the FTP server be used to upload files from the base station.
Therefore, this operation is available when you log in to the base station using the LMT rather
than the U2000 proxy.
Procedure
l GUI mode
1. In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
2. In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance >Common Maintenance. Double-
click Other File Transfer.
The Other File Transfer tab page is displayed.
3. Set related parameters on the Other File Transfer tab page. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 8-8.
Table 8-8 Parameter description
Parameter Description
IP address Specifies the IP address of the computer used as the LMT.
The IP address must be on the same network segment as the
IP address of the base station.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
Page 207
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 207/254
Parameter Description
User name Specifies the user name for logging in to the FTP server.
Password Specifies the password for logging in to the FTP server. The
default password is hwbs@com.
Destination File
Name
Specifies the file to be uploaded to the FTP server.
Transfer Type Upload(Site to FTP server) is selected by default.
NOTE
This parameter can be set to only Upload(Site to FTP server).
Function Type Selects ALL or the system that the base station supports.
File Type Specifies the type of the file to be uploaded. Different
Function Type correspond to different File Type. For details, see Table 8-9.
Upload Mode Compressed is selected by default.
Cabinet No. Specifies the number of the cabinet where the board or RRU
is located.
Subrack No. Specifies the number of the subrack where the board or RRU
is located.
Slot No. Specifies the number of the slot where the board or RRU is
located.
Transfer Status A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of file
transfer.
Table 8-9 File type description
Function Type File Type
ALL ALMLOG(Alarm Log), BAKOTHER
(Abnormal Configured File), BRDLOG
(Compositive Log), BSPLOG(BSPLog), CFLTLOG(NE Fault Log),
DBGLOG(NODE Commissioning
Log), EXPT(Exception-Recording
Log), GPSMSG(GPS Message Trace),
OPRLOG(Operation Log), PERILOG
(Monitoring Board Log), PIMTEST
(PIM Sweep Test Result File),
RFSTUFF(RF Test Log), RRULOG
(RRU Log).
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
Page 208
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 208/254
Function Type File Type
ENODEB BRDLOG-ENODEB(ENODEB
Compositive Log),
CALDPOWERFILE(AntennaCoefficient File), CHRLOG(Call
History Record Log), DBGLOG-
ENODEB(ENODEB Commissioning
Log).
NODEB BRDLOG-NODEB(NODEB
Compositive Log), DBGLOG-NODEB
(NODEB Commissioning Log),
DSPEXPT(DSP Exceptional Log),
DSPRUNLOG(DSP Running Log),
RRUIQDATA(RRU Interference
Detection file), RRURXPOWER(RRUInterference Detection power file),
RTWPTEST(RTWP Routine Test
Result Log).
GBTS BRDLOG-GBTS(GBTS Compositive
Log), DBGLOG-GBTS(GBTS
Commissioning Log), FRQLOG
(Frequency Scan Record Log),
GSMBBLOG(GSM BB Log), RFTST
(RF Test Record File), TODMSG(TOD
Message Trace).
4. Click Start.
l MML mode
1. Run the ULD FILE command to upload the file from the base station to the FTP
server.
----End
8.2.8 IP Transport Self Test
This section describes how to use the IP transport self test function. The IP transport self testfunction helps check the local transmission failure.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
Step 2In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > Common Maintenance. Double-click IP
Transport Self Test.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
Page 209
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 209/254
The IP Transport Self Test tab page is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the IP Transport Self Test dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 8-10.
Table 8-10 Parameters for IP transport self test
Parameter Description
Detection Item IP transfer detection item. This parameter can
be set to OM, SCTP, IP Path, or IP Clock .
Master/Slave flag This parameter can be set to MASTER or
SLAVE. This parameter is valid when
Detection Item is set to OM.
SCTP Link/ENDPoint Mode This parameter is set to SCTP Link by
default. This parameter is valid when
Detection Item is set to SCTP.
l If this parameter is set to SCTP Link ,
SCTP Link No. needs to be specified.
l If this parameter is set to ENDPoint
Mode, Local IP and Peer IP need to be
specified.
IP Path/ENDPoint Mode This parameter is set to IP Path by default.
This parameter is valid when Detection
Item is set to IP Path.
lIf this parameter is set to IP Path, IP PathID needs to be specified.
l If this parameter is set to ENDPoint
Mode, Local IP and Peer IP need to be
specified.
IP Clock ID ID of the detected IP clock. This parameter is
valid when Detection Item is set to IP
Clock .
Step 4 Click Start.
----End
8.3 Maintaining the GSM Base StationThis section describes how to maintain the cells and carriers of a GSM base station.
8.3.1 Querying Frequency Scan
This section describes how to query the maximum and average of the main level and diversity
level. By checking whether the signal strength of a frequency is greater than 0, you can determine
whether there is interference to the uplink frequency.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
Page 210
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 210/254
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
l The task of 8.3.2 Configuring Frequency Scan has been started.
Context
l This task is specific to GSM.
l Each carrier has two receive channels. One is the main receive channel and the other is the
diversity receive channel. The main level is the uplink signal level on the main receive
channel, and the diversity level is the uplink signal level on the diversity receive channel.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance. Double-click QueryFrequency Scan.
The Query Frequency Scan tab page is displayed.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Query Frequency Scan dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 8-11.
Table 8-11 Parameters for query frequency scan
Parameter Description
Local Cell Specifies the ID of the local cell. This parameter uniquely specifies a local
cell in a base station.
Sector ID Specifies the ID of a sector. This parameter uniquely specifies a sector in a
base station.
Step 4 Click Start.
----End
8.3.2 Configuring Frequency Scan
This section describes how to set the start time and period for scanning frequencies of a cell.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
This task is specific to GSM.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
Page 211
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 211/254
1. In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
2. In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance. Double-click
Configure Frequency Scan.
The Configure Frequency Scan dialog box is displayed.
3. Set related parameters in the Configure Frequency Scan dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 8-12.
Table 8-12 Parameters for configure frequency scan
Parameter Description
Local Cell Specifies the ID of the local cell. This parameter uniquely specifies
a local cell in a base station.
Sector ID Specifies the ID of a sector. This parameter uniquely specifies a
sector in a base station.
Start Time Specifies the start time of the scan.
Duration Specifies the duration of the scan.
Frequency Specifies the frequency to be scanned, which is dynamically
displayed based on base station configurations.
4. Click Start.
NOTE
After the configured frequencies are scanned, you can query the scanning results by using theQuerying Frequency Scan function.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the SET GCELLFREQSCAN command.
----End
8.3.3 Monitoring Channel Status
This section describes how to monitor the channel status.
PrerequisitesYou have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
This task is specific to GSM.
NOTICEQuery the channel status on the BSC LMT if channels of the type PBCCH+PDTCH, PCCCH
+PDTCH, or PDTCH are configured on a TRX.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
Page 212
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 212/254
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
2. In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance. Double-click Monitor Channel Status.
The Monitor Channel Status tab page is displayed.
3. Set related parameters on the Monitor Channel Status tab page.
4. Click Start.
NOTE
l A dot under a channel indicates a sub-channel. The standalone dedicated control channel
(SDCCH) has eight sub-channels, and the tr affic channel (TCH) has one sub-channel.
l The * mark to the upper right side of a carrier number indicates that the carrier works in mutual-
aid mode.
l The channel status monitoring window is fixed in size and does not change with the web page.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the DSP GTRXCHNSTAT command.
----End
8.3.4 Testing Channel Loopback
This section describes how to test the transmission capability of the traffic channel and voice
channel.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
This task is specific to GSM.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.2. In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance. Double-click
Test Channel Loopback .
The Test Channel Loopback tab page is displayed.
3. Set related parameters on the Test Channel Loopback tab page. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 8-13.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
Page 213
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 213/254
Table 8-13 Parameters for test channel loopback
Parameter Description
Local Cell Specifies the ID of the local cell. This parameter uniquely specifies
a local cell in a base station.
TRX ID Specifies the ID of the TRX to be tested. This parameter uniquely
specifies a TRX under a BSC.
Channel Specifies the number of the channel in a carrier.
Sub-channel Specifies the number of the sub-channel. When Test Project is set
to TRX RF Self-Loop Test or BIU Loop Test, Sub-channel is set
to All by default, and the parameter value cannot be modified. When
Test Project is set to BTS Voice Loop Test or TRX Voice Loop
Test, Sub-channel is set to All by default, and the parameter value
can be modified.
Test Project TRX RF Self-Loop Test, BIU Loop Test, BTS Voice Loop
Test or TRX Voice Loop Test can be selected.
Duration Specifies the duration of the test.
Power Level Specifies the power level of the test.
4. Click Start.
NOTE
The test result is displayed in the Test Report area.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the following commands to perform a channel loopback test:
– Run the STR GBTSTST command to start the test.
– Run the STP GBTSTST command to stop the test.
----End
8.3.5 Testing TRX Loopback
This section describes how to perform a transceiver (TRX) loopback test to learn about the TRX
performance and channel transmission status. The test helps you locate voice service problems.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
This task is specific to GSM.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
Page 214
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 214/254
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
2. In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance. Double-click Test TRX Loopback .
The Test TRX Loopback dialog box is displayed.
3. Set related parameters in the Test TRX Loopback dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 8-14.
Table 8-14 Parameters for testing TRX loopback
Parameter Description
Local Cell Specifies the ID of the local cell. This parameter uniquely specifiesa local cell in a base station.
TRX ID Specifies the ID of the TRX to be tested. This parameter uniquely
specifies a TRX under a BSC.
Test Item BIU Loop Test can be selected.
Duration (s) Specifies the duration of the test.
4. Click Start.
NOTE
The test result is displayed in the Test Report area.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the following commands to perform a TRX loopback test:
– Run the STR GBTSTST command to start the test.
– Run the STP GBTSTST command to stop the test.
----End
8.3.6 Modifying the Cell Management StatusThis section describes how to block or unblock a local cell.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l This task is specific to GSM.
l After a local cell is blocked, the corresponding logical cell is unavailable.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
Page 215
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 215/254
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
2. In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance. Double-click Modify Cell Management Status.
The Modify Cell Management Status tab page is displayed.
3. Set related parameters on the Modify Cell Management Status tab page. For details
about parameter descriptions, see Table 8-15.
Table 8-15 Parameters for modify cell management status
Parameter Description
Local Cell Specifies the ID of the local cell. This parameter uniquely specifies
a local cell in a base station.
Modified
Status
Lock or Unlock can be selected.
Current
Status
Specifies the current status of the selected local cell. Lock or
Unlock can be selected.
4. Click Apply.
NOTE
The test result is displayed in the Operation Result area.
l MML mode
The administrative status of a cell can be modified by running MML commands.
– To block a local cell, run the BLK GLOCELL command.
– To unblock a local cell, run the UBL GLOCELL command.
----End
8.3.7 Testing Idle Timeslot
This section describes how to test idle timeslots in the network to maximize interference in the
network.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
l This task is specific to GSM.
l To obtain information about the maximum interference level in the network during network
optimization phase, you can maximize the interference purposely. To achieve this, transmit
bursts on downlink idle channels under the condition that normal services are not affected.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
Page 216
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 216/254
The transmission of bursts on idle channels maximizes the downlink interference and the
uplink interference stimulated by downlink signals.
Procedure
l Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
1. In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
2. In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance. Double-click
Test Idle Timeslot.
The Test Idle Timeslot dialog box is displayed.
3. Set related parameters in the Test Idle Timeslot dialog box. For details about
parameter descriptions, see Table 8-16.
Table 8-16 Parameters for test idle timeslot
Parameter
Description
Local
Cell
Specifies the ID of the local cell. This parameter uniquely specifies a
local cell in a base station.
Sector ID Specifies the ID of a sector. This parameter uniquely specifies a sector
in a base station.
TRX ID Specifies the ID of the TRX to be tested. This parameter uniquely
specifies a TRX under a BSC.
Duration
(h)
Specifies hours that a test lasts.
4. Click Start.
NOTE
The test result is displayed in the Test Result area.
l Man-machine language (MML) command mode
Run the following commands to test idle timeslots:
– Run the STR GBTSTST command to start the test.
–Run the STP GBTSTST command to stop the test.
----End
8.4 Maintaining the LTE Base Station
This section describes how to check whether the eNodeB is installed correctly.
8.4.1 Engineering Quality Check
This section describes how to check whether the installation meets the requirement by executing
specified check scripts.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
Page 217
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 217/254
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Context
The check scripts are displayed in a table. They are executed one by one and the check results
are displayed.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > LTE Maintenance. Double-click
Engineering Quality Check .
The Engineering Quality Check tab page is displayed.
Step 3 Click Go. The check scripts are executed one by one and the result for each check item is
displayed.
NOTE
l The result for each check item is Pass, Failed, Error, or Ignore. Pass indicates that the check result
meets the expected requirement. Failed indicates that the check result does not meet the expected
requirement. Error indicates that the check fails due to an error during the check process. Ignore
indicates that the check item does not meet corresponding prerequisites.
Step 4 Click Export Self-test Report. The self-test report is saved in an HTML file. You can double-
click the saved file to view the check result on a browser.
----End
8.5 Maintenance
This section describes how to maintain base station equipment.
8.5.1 Emergency Diagnosis
This section describes how to perform emergency diagnosis to obtain information about theoperating status of the base station for clearing faults in a board.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the base station using the local maintenance terminal (LMT) and an
account with the required operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
l The information of each task is displayed on a new tab page that is arranged in cascading
mode in the window.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
Page 218
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 218/254
l EmergencyDiag is used to locate difficult problems on the live network. It allows you to
query NodeB running exceptions, but it does not reveal user information, such as
conversation contents.
NOTICE
The emergency diagnosis consumes some base station resources and therefore affects base
station services. Unless in emergencies, do not start emergency diagnosis.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
Step 2 In the Device Maintenance pane, choose Test, and double click Emergency Diagnosis.
The Emergency Diagnosis dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
l If the Emergency Diagnosis dialog box is not display, and an error message Error returned from
NE: The emergency diagnose task is already enabled. is displayed, Please restart the LMT after 5
minutes and log in to the LMT again.
l The emergency diagnosis window is fixed in size and does not change with the web page.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the Emergency Diagnosis dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 8-17.
Table 8-17 Parameters for emergency diagnosis
Parameter Description
Cabinet No. Specifies the cabinet number of the board.
Subrack No. Specifies the subrack number of the board.
Slot No. Specifies the slot number of the board.
CPU No. Specifies the CPU ID of the board.
Core No. Specifies the core number of the board.
Step 4 Click Submit.
An information output window is displayed. You can view the operating status of a specified
board to locate faults in the board.
NOTE
To change the folder for saving a result file, click Save on the Maintenance Data tab page. The Save dialog
box is displayed. Select a save path, and click Save.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
Page 219
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 219/254
8.5.2 CANBUS Emergency Diagnosis
This section describes how to perform CANBUS emergency diagnosis to obtain information
about the operating status of the base station for clearing faults in the cabinet control unit (CCU).
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the base station using the LMT and an account with the required
operation rights.
l The Java runtime environment (JRE) plug-in has been installed.
Context
l The information of each task is displayed on a new tab page that is arranged in cascading
mode in the window.
l CANBUS EmergencyDiag is used to locate difficult problems on the live network. It allowsyou to query NodeB running exceptions, but it does not reveal user information, such as
conversation contents.
l Primary CANBUS emergency diagnosis is not supported.
NOTICE
The emergency diagnosis and message tracing consume some base station resources and
therefore affect base station services. In a normal situation, do not enable emergency diagnosis
or message tracing.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
Step 2 In the Device Maintenance pane, choose Test, and double click CANBUS Emergency
Diagnosis.
The CANBUS Emergency Diagnosis dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
l If the Emergency Diagnosis dialog box is not display, and an error message Error returned from
NE: The emergency diagnose task is already enabled. is displayed, Please restart the LMT after 5
minutes and log in to the LMT again.
l The Canbus emergency diagnosis window is fixed in size and does not change with the web page.
Step 3 Set related parameters in the CANBUS EmergencyDiag dialog box. For details about parameter
descriptions, see Table 8-18.
Table 8-18 Parameters for Canbus emergency diagnosis
Parameter Description
Baudrate Specifies the Baudrate of the board.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
Page 220
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 220/254
Parameter Description
CPU Type Specifies the type of the CPU used by the board.
Cabinet No. Specifies the cabinet number of the board.
Subrack No. Specifies the subrack number of the board.
Slot No. Specifies the slot number of the board.
CPU No. Specifies the CPU number of the board.
Step 4 Click Submit.
An information output window is displayed. You can view the operating status of a specified
board to locate faults in the board.
NOTE
To change the folder for saving a result file, click Save under Maintenance Data. The Save dialog box is
displayed. Select a save path, and click Save.
----End
8.5.3 EmergencyDiag Command
This section describes how to select an emergency diagnose task and run a text command
supported by the system to locate and handle faults.
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the base station using the LMT and an account with the required
operation rights.
l At least one emergency diagnose task runs properly.
l You are an admin user and have obtained permission to use emergency commands from
the operator.
Context
A fault can be located by running the emergency command to obtain the system response
information.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
Step 2 In the Device Maintenance pane, choose Test, double click EmergencyDiag Command.
The EmergencyDiag Command dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
Ensure that an emergency diagnose task is running normally on the LMT and the commands are supported bythe base station.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
Page 221
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 221/254
Step 3 Set related parameters in the displayed EmergencyDiag Command dialog box. For details
about parameter descriptions, see Table 8-19.
Table 8-19 Parameters for running the emergency commands
Parameter Description
EmergencyDiag
Task Name
Specifies the running emergency diagnosis task.
Message Content Specifies the message content. The content is a string of characters.
Step 4 Click Submit.
Text information about the command is displayed in the EmergencyDiag window.
----End
8.6 BTS Self-test
This section describes how to use the base station self-test function. The base station self-test
function helps check the version of the base station software, running status of cells and RRUs,
and alarms.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT using an account with the required operation rights.
Procedure
Step 1 In the LMT main window, click Self Test.
The Self Test window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5 Self Test tab page
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
Page 222
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 222/254
Step 2 Set the command execution mode. For details, see 4.3 Running MML Commands in
Batches.
NOTE
In common mode, you can change a man-machine language (MML) command in the command input pane.
1. Click Open. In the displayed Open dialog box, select an MML script file and import the MML commands
in the file.
2. Click Save. All the MML commands are saved.
Step 3 Click Go. The MML commands are executed in sequence to check the status of base station
equipment. The command execution results are displayed in Current Execute Command.
Step 4 Click Clear Results to clear all contents displayed in Current Execute Command.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 8 Maintaining the Base Station
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
Page 223
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 223/254
9 FAQ
About This Chapter
This chapter provides the answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs) during the LMT use.
9.1 How to Switch a Minimum LMT Package to a Complete LMT Package
The postponement download mode is used by default when the local maintenance terminal
(LMT) software package is downloaded during a base station upgrade. A minimum LMT
package is downloaded first, and then a complete LMT package is downloaded based on the
requirement. If the base station is upgraded on the U2000 and a complete LMT package
(Software.csp) of the same version as the minimum LMT package is available on the U2000,
the complete LMT package can be automatically downloaded to the base station four hours after the upgrade. If the base station is upgraded on the LMT, the base station is properly connected
to the U2000, and a complete LMT package (Software.csp) of the same version as the minimum
LMT package is available on the U2000, the complete LMT package can be automatically
downloaded to the base station four hours after the upgrade. If the base station is upgraded on
the LMT or a complete LMT package is required immediately, you can download the complete
LMT package manually. This section describes the procedure for switching a minimum LMT
package to a complete LMT package.
9.2 Functions of the LMT Become Abnormal After an LMT Version Upgrade or Rollback
You need to clear the cache, cookies, and java applets in the browser if any of the following
scenarios apply: (a) The local maintenance terminal (LMT) does not display the target version
after the LMT upgrade or rollback. (b) The The MML configuration file parsed failed.
message is displayed when you run a man-machine language (MML) command. (c) Login to
the LMT succeeds and the tracing interface is displayed, but the functions are unavailable. For
example, the reported message cannot be displayed, or is not fully displayed, or is displayed out
of sequence, or is incompletely saved, or cannot be saved. (d) Device Panel fails to be opened
for the first time after the upgrade.
9.3 How to Increase the LMT Response Speed During the Use of the Firefox Browser
When the Firefox browser is used on the local maintenance terminal (LMT), the LMT response
is slow. For example, after you click Monitor, it takes about 30 seconds to maximize the window.
In this case, check that the add-on extension Live Margins is installed.
9.4 How to Handle Incorrect Display of Colors of the LMT Main Window
When the LMT uses the Internet Explorer, the colors of the LMT main window are not correctly
displayed. For example, the colors indicating the status of boards and alarms are not displayed,
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
Page 224
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 224/254
or the background color of the LMT main window is the same as that of the Internet Explorer.
In this case, check the color settings of the browser.
9.5 How to Handle Failed Display of the Verify Code in the LMT Login Dialog Box
When the LMT uses the Internet Explorer in the Microsoft Windows 2003, Microsoft Windows
2008, or Microsoft Windows Vista operating system, the verify code in the LMT login dialog
box cannot be displayed. In this case, check the settings related to the protection mode of the
browser.
9.6 How to Handle No Responses to the Operations Performed on the Menu of the LMT Main
Window
When the LMT uses an Internet Explorer, there are no res ponses to the operations performed
on the menu of the LMT main window or the script error occurs. For example, when you click
the menu bar or buttons in the window or right-click in the window, there is no response or a
script error is displayed, indicating that you are rejected or have no right to access the LMT. In
this case, check the proxy settings of the browser.
9.7 How to Clear Garbled Characters That Occurred in a CSV File in UTF-8 CodingIf a CSV file containing non-English characters and in UTF-8 coding is saved on the LMT and
the CSV file is opened in Excel format using the regular method, all non-English characters are
displayed as garbled characters. In this case, import the CSV file to Excel to open the file.
9.8 How to Set a Correct SSL Security Certificate
If a browser such as the Internet Explorer or Firefox uses the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
protocol to connect to the local maintenance terminal (LMT), a message indicating an incorrect
certificate may be displayed. As a result, you may fail to log in to the LMT.
9.9 How to R ectify Errors That Occurr While Saving a File
If the function of saving operation results is configured when you first log in to the LMT, the
system may display an error message during result file saving. In this case, the file size is zero bytes.
9.10 How to Avoid the Failure to Log In to the LMT Due to a High Default Internet Explorer
Security Level
In Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2008, the Internet Explorer blocks Web programs
on sites that are not in the trusted site list to improve system security. As a result, you may fail
to log in to the LMT.
9.11 How to Handle the Slow Redirection After Logging in to the LMT
When the LMT uses the Internet Explorer, the redirection is slow after you log in to the LMT,
that is, the explorer remains blank for more than 15 seconds after you enter the base station IP
address in the address box of the Internet Explorer and before the explorer displays a securitywarning. This section describes how to solve the problem.
9.12 How to Handle the LMT Interface Disorder
When the LMT uses Internet Explorer 8 or 9, the LMT interface may be displayed in disorder.
In this case, manually set the compatibility views of the Internet Explorer before logging in to
the LMT. This section describes the setting method.
9.13 How to Handle the Unknown Error Occurrs on LMT Interface or MML Command
Execution Failure After a Browser Upgrade
After Internet Explorer 6 is upgraded to Internet Explorer 8 or 9, some cached files cannot be
cleared. If an unknown error occurrs on LMT interface, or a man-machine language (MML)
command is executed, the system displays The MML configuration file parsed failed.. To
solve the pro blem, manually clear the cache and cookies in the Internet Explorer.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
Page 225
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 225/254
9.14 How to Handle Error Message Displayed on the LMT or No Responses to Operations
Performed on the LMT Login Window
The error message Problems with this Web page might prevent it from being displayed
properly or functioning properly. is displayed in the Internet Explorer, or there is no response
to the operations performed on the LMT login window during the logging in of the LMT.
9.15 How to Install OS Patches
If the LMT runs the Microsoft Windows 2003 operating system (OS), the security patch
KB938397 must be installed.
9.16 What Do I Do if Tracing, Monitoring or Other Functions Cannot Be Used?
Tracing, monitoring or other functions cannot be used after a successful login to the LMT, and
an error message is displayed.
9.17 What Do I Do If There Is No Response or Any Error Message After a Tracing, Monitoring
or Other Task Is Created
Some time af ter a successful login to the LMT, you may suddenly find that batch processing
fails with no error message. Alternatively, after a tracing or monitoring task is created, the task page is not opened. There is no response or any error message. The NE task list shows that this
task has been successfully created. Or right-click in the message browsing window and choose
save messages, the Save dialog box is not displayed. If you open a new browser and log in to
the LMT again, the task nevertheless can be successfully created. If either of the previous
problems occurs, perform the following operations.
9.18 How to Handle the Problem That Only the Error Code Is Displayed in an Error Message
After a Tracing or Monitoring Task Is Created
Messages related to base station errors have been configured. However, the local maintenance
terminal (LMT) displays only the error code rather than the error message when a base station
error occurs. If the previous problem occurs, perform the following operations:
9.19 Any Fur ther Operation Performed When Some LMT Web Pages Fail to Update Causes the
Web Pages to Turn Blank
Some LMT Web pages fail to update when batch processing, tracing, or monitoring is in use.
Any further o peration causes the Web pages to turn blank. If you restart the function, the Web
page returns to normal. To prevent this problem, perform the following operations to add an
environment variable.
9.20 How to Handle the LMT Exit After Clicking Trace, Monitor, or Device Maintenance Tab
in Window 7
When you have successfully logged in to the LMT, the interface is redirected to the other
interface if you click the Trace, Monitor, or Device Maintenance tab. A few seconds after the
redirection, the interface is automatically redirected to the login window of the LMT and a loginfailure message is prompted.
9.21 How to Handle the Disconnection Between the LMT and Base Station After the Device
Digital Certif icate Is Replaced
During base station deployment using Plug and Play (PnP), device digital certificate addition or
deletion, the local maintenance terminal (LMT) is disconnected from the base station.
9.22 How to Handle Exceptions in the LMT Due to Insufficient PC Memory
If the memor y space for the local maintenance terminal (LMT) PC is insufficient, exceptions
occur when the LMT runs on the PC.
9.23 Error Message "This user session already exists" Upon Login to LMT
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
Page 226
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 226/254
The interface displays an error message this user session already exists upon login to LMT.
Solve the problem by using the method described in the procedure part.
9.24 Interfaces for Performing Tracing or Monitoring Tasks Blinking
Interfaces for performing tracing or monitoring tasks blink.
9.25 The web site's certificate cannot be verified.Do you want to continue? Is Displayed During
Tracing or Monitoring
During initialization of a task such as tracing or monitoring on the LMT, "The web site's
certificate cannot be verified.Do you want to continue?" is displayed.
9.26 Batch Execution of MML Commands Fails Because Some MML Commands Contain
Invisible Carriage Returns or Line Feeds
After line feeds (LF) are deleted from MML command scripts copied to Batch, command
execution fails.
9.27 How to Handle Shortcut Key Invalidation
Shortcut keys are defined on the LMT. When logging in to the LMT through a web page, youmay fail to use the corresponding function by pressing a shortcut key. In this case, the shortcut
key becomes invalid. For example, you cannot stop pinging by pressing Ctrl+Q in the MML
Command window. This is because the same shortcut key is preferentially used by another
running program on the PC, which leads to a shortcut key conflict.
9.28 What Do I Do If A Message "Stop running this script?" Is Displayed?
This section describes how to solve the problem that a message "Stop running this script?" is
displayed dur ing script execution on the LMT.
9.29 A Message checking client environment... Is Displayed on the Login Window and the
browser Does Not Respond
During the login to the WebLMT, a message "checking client environment..." is displayed on
the login window and the browser does not respond and has to be forcibly closed. In this case,
solve the pro blem by using the method described in the procedure part.
9.30 LMT Login Window Being Stopped by the Browser
The LMT login window is stopped by the browse, and the login stills fails even though the user
selects Allow popups. To solve the problem, perform the following steps:
9.31 The Application Blocked by Security Settings Dialog Box Is Displayed When Batch
Processing, Tracing, Monitoring, or Device Maintenance Is Enabled
After the JRE is installed or upgraded, the Application Blocked by Security Settings dialog
box is displayed when the tab page related to batch processing, tracing, monitoring, or device
maintenance is open. Click OK , and the The application cannot be run dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the batch processing, tracing, monitoring, or device maintenance function is
unavailable.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
Page 227
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 227/254
9.1 How to Switch a Minimum LMT Package to a Complete
LMT PackageThe postponement download mode is used by default when the local maintenance terminal
(LMT) software package is downloaded during a base station upgrade. A minimum LMT
package is downloaded first, and then a complete LMT package is downloaded based on the
requirement. If the base station is upgraded on the U2000 and a complete LMT package
(Software.csp) of the same version as the minimum LMT package is available on the U2000,
the complete LMT package can be automatically downloaded to the base station four hours after
the upgrade. If the base station is upgraded on the LMT, the base station is properly connected
to the U2000, and a complete LMT package (Software.csp) of the same version as the minimum
LMT package is available on the U2000, the complete LMT package can be automatically
downloaded to the base station four hours after the upgrade. If the base station is upgraded on
the LMT or a complete LMT package is required immediately, you can download the completeLMT package manually. This section describes the procedure for switching a minimum LMT
package to a complete LMT package.
Prerequisites
l The LMT directly communicates with the base station, and direct File Transfer Protocol
(FTP) download is enabled between them. Ports 20 and 21 are enabled.
l The minimum LMT package can be used normally.
Context
l The minimum LMT package provides only some functions that involve the download of the FTP server software and some MML commands.
l The complete LMT package provides complete LMT functions, including MML command
running, batch processing, alarm management, tracing management, performance
monitoring, equipment maintenance, and self-test.
NOTE
l The file name of the complete LMT package must be Software.csp. If the package is in compressed
format, you need to manually decompress the package and download the Software.csp file to the base
station using the FTP server.
l After the minimum LMT package is switched to the complete LMT package, boards do not reset. You
can use the functions of the complete LMT package after you log in to the LMT again.
l Except for local operation and maintenance (OM) services, the switch process does not interrupt other
services carried by the base station.
Procedure
Step 1 Download the FTP server software. (Optional. Perform this step only when there is no FTP
server at the LMT computer.)
1. In the upper right corner of the LMT main window, click FTP Tool. The File Download-
Security Warning dialog box is displayed.
2. Click Save to save the FTP server software SFTPServer.exe to the LMT computer.
Step 2 Double-click SFTPServer.exe. SFTPServer.exe is decompressed into an SFTPServer folder.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
Page 228
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 228/254
Step 3 Open SFTPServer. Double-click SFTPServer.exe to start the FTP server. The icon is
displayed on the right side of the taskbar after the FTP server is started.
l If the FTP server runs for the first time, go to Step 4.
l
Otherwise, go to Step 5.
Step 4 Configure the FTP server.
1. Double-click . The FTP server configuration dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 FTP server configuration dialog box
2. Set User name, Password, Working directory, the default user name is admin. Set
Working directory to the root directory of the FTP server, which is D:\FTP, and retain
default values for other parameters.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
Page 229
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 229/254
NOTE
l The user name, password, and other parameters displayed in the FTP server configuration
dialog box can be modified as required.
l The method for modifying the password of the FTP server is as follows: Enter a new password
in Password and click OK . The FTP password authentication dialog box is displayed. InFTP password authentication, enter the old password and the new password that needs to
be authenticated, and then click OK . The password is successfully modified and the new
password takes effect.
l The method for modifying the FTP user name and other parameters displayed in the FTP
server configuration dialog box is as follows: Enter the changed value in the text boxes of
parameters and click OK . The FTP password authentication dialog box is displayed. In
the FTP password authentication dialog box, enter the valid password and click OK . The
parameters are successfully modified.
l If you forget the password of the FTP server, delete the FTP server applications, and then
download and reinstall them. Then, the user name and password of the FTP server are restored
to the default ones.
lWorking directory must be set to a specified path for storing software and data configurationfiles because the FTP server cannot access the files not stored in Working directory.
l Plain text indicates that data is transmitted in plaintext format. Encrypted indicates that data is
transmitted in ciphertext format. Both indicates data can be transmitted in the format of plaintext
or ciphertext as required.
l Click SSL Settings, and configure parameters used for data encryption and transmission using
the FTP server on the displayed SSL Settings dialog box. These parameters include Root
Certificate FIle Name, Certificate FIle Name, Private Key File Name, and Private Key
Password. Ensure that the root certificate file, certificate file, and private key file must be stored
in the same directory as SFTPServer.exe.
l During an upgrade of the LMT, if LmtView Common component under Select Software
Components is selected, the password of the FTP tool is restored to the default password
hwbs@com after an upgrade.
l If the running FTP tool is SingleRAN V100R007C00, NodeB V200R015C00, LTE
V100R005C01, or an earlier version, the changes on the parameters of the FTP server take effect,
without entering the password.
l To implement data or file transfer between the FTP server and base station, you must log in to
the base station using the LMT, not the remote U2000 proxy.
3. Click OK . The FTP server is successfully configured.
Step 5 Run the SPL SOFTWARE command to download the complete LMT package to the base
station using the FTP server.
NOTE
You must enter the IP address, user name, and password for logging in to the FTP server correctly and set Delay
Download File Supply Flag to YES (Supply File that Support Delay).
Step 6 Log in to the LMT again to use the functions of the complete LMT package.
----End
9.2 Functions of the LMT Become Abnormal After an LMTVersion Upgrade or Rollback
You need to clear the cache, cookies, and java applets in the browser if any of the following
scenarios apply: (a) The local maintenance terminal (LMT) does not display the target version
after the LMT upgrade or rollback. (b) The The MML configuration file parsed failed.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
Page 230
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 230/254
message is displayed when you run a man-machine language (MML) command. (c) Login to
the LMT succeeds and the tracing interface is displayed, but the functions are unavailable. For
example, the reported message cannot be displayed, or is not fully displayed, or is displayed out
of sequence, or is incompletely saved, or cannot be saved. (d) Device Panel fails to be opened
for the first time after the upgrade.
Procedure
l To clear the cache and cookies in the browser, perform the steps shown in the following
table.
Browser Type
Handling Procedure
Firefox 1. Open the Firefox browser, and choose Tools > Clear Private Data from
the menu bar.
2. In the displayed Clear Private Data dialog box, select the Cache,Cookies, and Offline Website Data check boxes, and click Clear Private
Data Now.
Internet
Explore
r 7.0
1. Open the Internet Explorer, and choose Tools > Internet Options from
the menu bar. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed.
2. On the General tab page, click Delete. The Delete Browsing History
dialog box is displayed.
3. To delete the files, click Delete Files and then click OK in the displayed
dialog box. To delete the cookies, click Delete Cookies and then click
OK in the displayed dialog box.
4. In the Delete Browsing History dialog box, click OK and close theInternet Options dialog box.
Internet
Explore
r 8.0 or
9.0
1. Open the Internet Explorer, and choose Tools > Internet Options from
the menu bar. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed.
2. On the General tab page, click Delete. The Delete Browsing History
dialog box is displayed.
3. Clear the Preserve Favorites website data check box and select the
Cookies and Temporary Internet files check boxes. Then, click
Delete and close the Internet Options dialog box.
l To clear the Java Applet, perform the following steps:
NOTICE
Before you clear the Java Applet, exit the LMT. Otherwise, some loaded data will be lost
and unexpected errors will occur.
1. Choose Start > Control Panel. The Control Panel is displayed.
2. Double-click Java in the displayed window. The JAVA Control Panel is displayed.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
Page 231
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 231/254
3. On the General tab page, click Settings. The Temporary Files Settings dialog box
is displayed.
4. Click Delete Files. In the displayed Delete Temporary Files dialog box, select the
Applications and Applets and Trace and Log Files check boxes, and click OK .
5. In Java Control Panel, click OK .
6. The operations take effect after the browser restarts.
----End
9.3 How to Increase the LMT Response Speed During theUse of the Firefox Browser
When the Firefox browser is used on the local maintenance terminal (LMT), the LMT response
is slow. For example, after you click Monitor, it takes about 30 seconds to maximize the window.In this case, check that the add-on extension Live Margins is installed.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the Firefox browser, and choose Tools > Add-ons from the menu bar. The Add-ons
window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Extensions tab page, select Live Margins, and click Disable. A message is displayed,
indicating that the changes will take effect after the Firefox browser restarts.
Step 3 Click Restart Firefox to make the changes take effect.
----End
9.4 How to Handle Incorrect Display of Colors of the LMT
Main Window
When the LMT uses the Internet Explorer, the colors of the LMT main window are not correctly
displayed. For example, the colors indicating the status of boards and alarms are not displayed,
or the background color of the LMT main window is the same as that of the Internet Explorer.
In this case, check the color settings of the browser.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the Internet Explorer, and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar. The
Internet Options dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 On the General tab page, click Accessibility. The Accessibility dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 In the Formatting area, select Ignore colors specified on Web pages, and click OK .
Step 4 In the Internet Options dialog box, click OK to exit the dialog box.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
Page 232
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 232/254
9.5 How to Handle Failed Display of the Verify Code in the
LMT Login Dialog BoxWhen the LMT uses the Internet Explorer in the Microsoft Windows 2003, Microsoft Windows
2008, or Microsoft Windows Vista operating system, the verify code in the LMT login dialog
box cannot be displayed. In this case, check the settings related to the protection mode of the
browser.
Context
If the protection mode is enabled in the Microsoft Windows 2003, Microsoft Windows 2008, or
Microsoft Windows Vista operating system, many security restrictions are imposed. For
example, neither JavaScript nor Applet can be run. Therefore, you must disable the protection
mode. If the protection mode is enabled, the LMT main window cannot be normally displayed.
Procedure
Step 1 In the address box of the Internet Explorer, enter the IP address of the base station for local
maintenance. The default IP address is 192.168.0.49.
Step 2 Click Go next to the address box. The Local Maintenance Terminal dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Check whether the message "Internet|Protected Mode: Off" is displayed in the lower right corner
of the window.
l If the message is displayed, contact Huawei technical support.
l If the message is not displayed, go to Step 4.
Step 4 Open the Internet Explorer, and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar. The
Internet Options dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 On the Security tab page, select Trusted sites in the Select a Web content zone to specify its
security settings area.
Step 6 Under Zone Security Level, clear Enable Protected Mode, and then click Sites. The Trusted
sites dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Enter the IP address of the base station for local maintenance in the Add this Web site to the
zone text box. The default IP address is 192.168.0.49. Then, click Add. The site is added to the
Trusted sites list.
Step 8 In the Internet Options dialog box, click OK to exit the dialog box.
Step 9 The verify code can be displayed after the Internet Explorer restarts.
----End
9.6 How to Handle No Responses to the Operations
Performed on the Menu of the LMT Main Window
When the LMT uses an Internet Explorer, there are no responses to the operations performed
on the menu of the LMT main window or the script error occurs. For example, when you click
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
Page 233
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 233/254
the menu bar or buttons in the window or right-click in the window, there is no response or a
script error is displayed, indicating that you are rejected or have no right to access the LMT. In
this case, check the proxy settings of the browser.
Context
Do not change the settings of the Internet Explorer when the LMT is in use. Set the proxy server
before you log in to the LMT.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the Internet Explorer, and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar. The
Internet Options dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 On the Connections tab page, click LAN Settings. The LAN Settings dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 In the Proxy server area, select Use a proxy server for your LAN (These settings will notapply to dial-up or VPN connections). Enter the IP address and port number of the proxy server
in the corresponding boxes, and then click Advanced. The Proxy settings dialog box is
displayed.
Step 4 In the Exceptions area, enter the IP address of the base station for local maintenance in the text
box. The default IP address is 192.168.0.49. Then, click OK and close the Internet Options
dialog box.
----End
9.7 How to Clear Garbled Characters That Occurred in aCSV File in UTF-8 Coding
If a CSV file containing non-English characters and in UTF-8 coding is saved on the LMT and
the CSV file is opened in Excel format using the regular method, all non-English characters are
displayed as garbled characters. In this case, import the CSV file to Excel to open the file.
Procedure
Step 1 On the menu bar of Excel, choose Data > Import External Data > Import Data. The Select
Data Source dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box, select the CSV file in UTF-8 coding. The Text Import
Wizard - Step 1 of 3 dialog box is displayed. Then, select 65001: Unicode (UTF-8) from the
File origin drop-down list. Click Next.
The Text Import Wizard - Step 2 of 3 dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Select Comma under Delimiters. Click Finish.
The Import Data dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 click OK . The file will be normally displayed.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
Page 234
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 234/254
9.8 How to Set a Correct SSL Security Certificate
If a browser such as the Internet Explorer or Firefox uses the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
protocol to connect to the local maintenance terminal (LMT), a message indicating an incorrect
certificate may be displayed. As a result, you may fail to log in to the LMT.
Context
l Internet Explorer (Internet Explorer 8 as an example.)
– The Certificate Invalid alarm is displayed when you log in to the LMT in HTTPS
mode.
1. Enter https:// IP address of the base station (for example, https://10.141.115.219)
in the address box of the Internet Explorer. The There is a problem of this
website's security certificate. dialog box is displayed.
2. Click Continue to this website (not recommended). in the There is a problem
of this website's security certificate. dialog box to enter the LMT login page.
However, a Certificate error warning is displayed in the address box.
3. Click Certificate error. The Certificate Invalid dialog box is displayed.
– The Mismatched Address alarm is displayed when you log in to the LMT in HTTPS
mode.
1. Enter https://a virtual external IP address (for example, https://10.141.115.219)
in the address box of the Internet Explorer. A There is a problem of this website's
security certificate. dialog box is displayed.
2. Click Continue to this website (not recommended). in the There is a problem
of this website's security certificate. dialog box to enter the LMT login page.
However, a Certificate error warning is displayed in the address box.
3. Click Certificate error. A Mismatched Address dialog box is displayed.
l Firefox browser (Firefox 3 as an example)
Enter https://a virtual external IP address (for example, https://10.148.63.106) in the
address box of the browser. A This connection is Untrusted dialog box is displayed.
Procedure
l
In the Internet Explorer, the Certificate Invalid alarm is displayed when you log in to theLMT in HTTPS mode.
– If the SSL application certificate uses the WebLMT predefined certificate, perform
the following steps:
1. On the login interface, click Download CA Certificate. In the displayed dialog box,
click Save. After the download is complete, the ca.zip file is saved.
2. Decompress the ca.zip file.
NOTE
The ca.zip file is decompressed into two files: ne.cer and oss.cer. The ne.cer file is the root
certificate of Huawei certificate predefined for the LMT and the oss.cer file is the root
certificate predefined for the U2000 proxy server.
3. Double-click ne.cer or oss.cer.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
Page 235
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 235/254
A Certificate Import Wizard dialog box is displayed.
4. Click Next, choose the Place all certificates in the following store option button,
and click Browse.
A Select Certificate Store dialog box is displayed.5. Choose Trusted Root Certification Authorities and click OK .
6. Click Next, then click Finish and confirm that the ne.cer file has been imported.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to import the oss.cer file.
– If the SSL application certificate uses the digital certificate issued by the customer's
PKI system, perform the following steps:
1. Start Internet browser, and choose Tools > Internet Options. The Internet
Options dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Content tab, and click Certificates. The Certificates dialog box is
displayed.3. Click the Trusted Root Certification Authorities tab, and then click Import.
The Certificate Import Wizard dialog box is displayed.
4. Click Next, and click Browse in the displayed dialog box. Select the target root
certificate.
5. Click Next, choose Place all certificates in the following store and click Browse.
A Select Certificate Store dialog box is displayed.
6. Choose Trusted Root Certification Authorities and click OK .
7. Click Next, then click Finish and confirm that the certificate import is complete.
l In the Internet Explorer, the Mismatched Address alarm is displayed when you log in to
the LMT in HTTPS mode.
1. Choose Internet Options from Tools on the toolbar.
2. In the Internet Options dialog box, click the Advanced tab.
3. In the Internet Options group box, clear the Warn about certificate address
mismatched* check box and click OK .
NOTE
Restart the Internet Explorer to make the modification take effect.
l Firefox browser
1. Click Add Exception in the This connection is Untrusted dialog box. An Add
Security Exception dialog box is displayed.
2. Click Get Certificate.
NOTE
Firefox 10 obtains the certificate only in HTTP mode. Therefore, modify the server address
prefix to http before you use Firefox 10 to obtain the certificate.
3. Click Confirm Security Exception. After the website is successfully added as a
security exception, no more security alarms will be displayed when the Firefox
browser is used to connect to the LMT in the future.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
Page 236
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 236/254
9.9 How to Rectify Errors That Occurr While Saving a File
If the function of saving operation results is configured when you first log in to the LMT, the
system may display an error message during result file saving. In this case, the file size is zero
bytes.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Control Panel. In Control Panel, click Java. The JAVA Control Panel is
displayed.
NOTE
If you do not see the Java item in Control Panel, switch to another view.
Step 2 In Java Control Panel, click the Advanced tab. On the displayed tab page, choose Java Plug-
in > Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in (requires browser restart) in the Settingsnavigation tree, and then click OK .
Step 3 Restart the LMT.
----End
9.10 How to Avoid the Failure to Log In to the LMT Due to
a High Default Internet Explorer Security Level
In Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2008, the Internet Explorer blocks Web programs
on sites that are not in the trusted site list to improve system security. As a result, you may fail
to log in to the LMT.
Context
According to acceptable Internet Explorer security levels, there are the following two solutions:
l If lowering the Internet Explorer security level on the Windows server is unacceptable, you
can add the LMT site to the trusted site list of the Internet Explorer using a configuration
startup script. The system automatically loads the script and configures the Internet
Explorer after a user logs in.
l If lowering the Internet Explorer security level on the Windows server is acceptable, youcan remove Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration, a Windows component.
Procedure
l To set a configuration startup script, perform the following steps:
1. Create a configuration startup script.
Enter the following script contents in a notepad and save it as an IE-unset.bat file.
@echo off
setlocal ENABLEDELAYEDEXPANSION
set uu="HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion
\Internet Settings"reg add %uu% /v EnableHttp1_1 /t REG_DWORD /d "1" /f >nul
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
Page 237
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 237/254
reg add %uu% /v ProxyHttp1.1 /t REG_DWORD /d "1" /f >nul
setlocal ENABLEDELAYEDEXPANSION
set uu="HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion
\Internet Settings\ZoneMap\EscRanges\Trust"
reg add %uu% /v :Range /t REG_SZ /d "10.141.149.193" /f >nul
reg add %uu% /v http /t REG_DWORD /d "2" /f >nul
reg add %uu% /v https /t REG_DWORD /d "2" /f >nul
NOTE
l The IE-unset.bat script file enables the system to automatically add a site to the trusted site list
of the Internet Explorer.
l You can modify the file when required, for example, change 10.141.149.193 in reg add %uu
% /v :Range REG_SZ /d "10.141.149.193" /f >nul to the IP address of the network element
to be visited.
l The Trust field in HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows
\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings\ZoneMap\EscRanges\Trust can be named as required.
2. Load the startup script.
–If the LMT runs on a Windows server, perform the following steps to set the script:
a. Log in to the Windows server with an administrator account, and choose
Start > Run.
b. Enter gpedit.msc in the displayed dialog box, and click OK . The Group
Policy Object Editor dialog box is displayed.
c. In the displayed dialog box, choose User Configuration > Windows
Settings > Scripts(Logon/Logoff), and double-click Logon.
The Logon Properties dialog box is displayed.
d. Click Show Files and copy the created script to the displayed folder. Then,
close the dialog box displaying the folder.
e. Click Add.
The Add a Script dialog box is displayed.
f. Click Browse to select the created script and click OK .
g. Click Apply and verify that the script is loaded successfully.
– If the LMT runs on a Citrix Farm network, perform the following steps to set the
script:
a. Log in to the primary or secondary Citrix domain control server with an
administrator account, and choose Start > Programs > Administrative
Tools > Active Directory Users and Computer. Select an organization unit
such as OSS and right-click Properties. Click the Group Policy tab in thedisplayed dialog box, and click New on the displayed tab page to create a
group policy object.
NOTE
You can rename the group policy object as required.
b. Select the created group policy object and click Edit. In the displayed dialog
box, choose User Configuration > Windows Settings > Scripts(Logon/
Logoff), and double-click Logon.
The Logon Properties dialog box is displayed.
c. Click Show Files and copy the created script to the displayed folder. Then,
close the dialog box displaying the folder.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
Page 238
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 238/254
d. Click Add.
The Add a Script dialog box is displayed.
e. Click Browse to select the created script and click OK .
f. Click Apply and verify that the script is loaded successfully.l To remove Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration, perform the following
steps:
1. Choose Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. In the displayed dialog
box, select Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration.
2. Click Details. In the displayed dialog box, clear For administrator groups and For
all other user groups.
3. Click OK and then Next to remove Internet Explorer Enhanced Security
Configuration. After the removal is completed, click Finish.
4. Restart the Internet Explorer to make the settings take effect.
----End
9.11 How to Handle the Slow Redirection After Logging in
to the LMT
When the LMT uses the Internet Explorer, the redirection is slow after you log in to the LMT,
that is, the explorer remains blank for more than 15 seconds after you enter the base station IP
address in the address box of the Internet Explorer and before the explorer displays a security
warning. This section describes how to solve the problem.
Prerequisites
l The LMT directly communicates with the base station.
l You log in to the LMT in HTTPS mode.
l The operating system is Microsoft Windows 2003.
Context
In HTTPS mode, the interface will be redirected to HTTPS after you enter the IP address in the
address box of the Internet Explorer. After you log in to the LMT in HTTPS mode, Windows
visits the Microsoft website and updates the trusted root certification list until the updatesucceeds or expires. In this period, the certification authentication in HPPTS mode is slow.
Generally, if you can visit the base station on the LMT, you can access the Intranet but not the
Internet. You can accelerate the visit to the LMT by disabling this function.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Start > Control Panel. The Control Panel is displayed.
Step 2 In Control Panel, click Add or Remove Programs. The Add or Remove Programs window
is displayed.
Step 3In the Add or Remove Programs window, click Add/Remove Windows Components. The
Windows Components Wizard window is displayed.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
Page 239
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 239/254
Step 4 In the Components area of the Windows Components Wizard window, clear the Update Root
Certificates check box.
Step 5 Click Next. The system automatically performs the configuration.
Step 6 After the configuration is complete, click Finish.
----End
9.12 How to Handle the LMT Interface Disorder
When the LMT uses Internet Explorer 8 or 9, the LMT interface may be displayed in disorder.
In this case, manually set the compatibility views of the Internet Explorer before logging in to
the LMT. This section describes the setting method.
Prerequisitesl Internet Explorer 8 or 9 is used.
l The LMT interface is displayed in disorder.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the Internet Explorer. Choose Tools > Compatibility View Settings.
The Compatibility View Settings dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the Add this website text box, enter the IP address of the network element (NE), for example,
10.147.212.161. Click Add. Select the Display all websites in compatibility view check boxand click Close.
Step 3 The LMT interface is displayed in order after you log in to the LMT again.
----End
9.13 How to Handle the Unknown Error Occurrs on LMTInterface or MML Command Execution Failure After aBrowser Upgrade
After Internet Explorer 6 is upgraded to Internet Explorer 8 or 9, some cached files cannot be
cleared. If an unknown error occurrs on LMT interface, or a man-machine language (MML)
command is executed, the system displays The MML configuration file parsed failed.. To
solve the problem, manually clear the cache and cookies in the Internet Explorer.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the Internet Explorer 8 or 9, and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar.
The Internet Options dialog box is displayed.
Step 2On the General tab page, click Delete in the Browsing history area. The Delete Browsing
History dialog box is displayed.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
Page 240
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 240/254
Step 3 Clear the Preserve Favorites website data check box, select the Cookie and Temporary
Internet files check boxes, and click Delete.
Step 4 Close the Delete Browsing History dialog box.
Step 5 On the General tab page, click Settings in the Browsing history area. The Temporary InternetFiles and History Settings dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click View objects and delete all displayed files.
Step 7 Close the displayed window and the Internet Options dialog box.
----End
9.14 How to Handle Error Message Displayed on the LMT
or No Responses to Operations Performed on the LMTLogin Window
The error message Problems with this Web page might prevent it from being displayed
properly or functioning properly. is displayed in the Internet Explorer, or there is no response
to the operations performed on the LMT login window during the logging in of the LMT.
Context
If the Internet Explorer has insufficient buffer or is upgraded, the Internet Explorer cannot obtain
new files from a base station after the base station is upgraded. The Internet Explorer obtains
files about the base station in the original version from the buffer, which is inconsistent with theinformation about the base station in the current version.
Procedure
l Internet Explorer Browser
1. Open the Internet Explorer, and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar.
The Internet Options dialog box is displayed.
2. On the General tab page, click Delete in the Browsing history area. The Delete
Browsing History dialog box is displayed.
3. Clear the Preserve Favorites website data check box, select the Cookie andTemporary Internet files check boxes, and click Delete.
4. Close the Delete Browsing History dialog box.
5. On the General tab page, click Settings in the Browsing history area. The
Temporary Internet Files and History Settings dialog box is displayed.
6. Click View objects and delete all displayed files.
7. Close the displayed window and the Internet Options dialog box.
l Firefox Browser
1. Open the Firefox browser, and choose Tools > Clear Private Data from the menu
bar.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
Page 241
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 241/254
2. In the displayed Clear Private Data dialog box, select the Cache, Cookies, and
Offline Website Data check boxes, and click Clear Private Data Now.
----End
9.15 How to Install OS Patches
If the LMT runs the Microsoft Windows 2003 operating system (OS), the security patch
KB938397 must be installed.
Context
Patch KB938397 rectifies the problem that the Windows operating system does not support
SHA256.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Control Panel. The Control Panel is displayed. Double-click Add or Remove
Programs in the displayed window. The Add or Remove Programs dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the displayed Add or Remove Programs dialog box, select Show updates. Check whether
patch KB938397 is present in the list of Currently installed programs.
l If the patch is present in the list, contact Huawei technical support.
l If the patch is not present in the list, go to Step 3.
Step 3 Download the security patch.
NOTE
To download the patch KB938397, visit http://support.microsoft.com/?kbid=938397.
----End
9.16 What Do I Do if Tracing, Monitoring or Other FunctionsCannot Be Used?
Tracing, monitoring or other functions cannot be used after a successful login to the LMT, and
an error message is displayed.
Context
The error message is shown in Figure 9-2. After clicking Details, detailed error information is
displayed. You need to correct the error based on the error type.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
Page 242
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 242/254
Figure 9-2 The error message dialog box
l If the java.lang.ClassNotFoundException error is displayed, perform steps 1 and 2.
Figure 9-3 java.lang.ClassNotFoundException error
l If the netscape.javascript.JSException error is displayed, perform Step 3.
Figure 9-4 netscape.javascript.JSException error
l If this problem occurs in Citrix Farm networking, you need to perform related steps on the
Citrix Farm server rather than on the local PC. If you have no permission to log in to the
Citrix Farm server, you cannot directly access Windows Control Panel on the Citrix Farm
server. To access it, right-click the Java icon on Windows system tray on the local PC and
choose Open Control Panel from the short-cut menu. The following figure shows the
window:
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
Page 243
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 243/254
Figure 9-5 Opening control panel
l This problem is caused by a Java defect. For details about this defect, visit http://
bugs.sun.com/bugdatabase/view_bug.do?bug_id=6967414.
Procedure
Step 1 Enable the next-generation Java plug-in again.
1. Open Control Panel in the Windows operating system and double-click Java. The Java
Control Panel dialog box is displayed. In the Java Control Panel dialog box, click the
Advanced tab, clear Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in (requires browser
restart) under Java Plug-in and click OK .
2. Select Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in (requires browser restart) by referring
to Step 1.1 and click OK .
3. Restart the browser to enable the new setting to take effect.
Step 2 Delete temporary Java files.
If this problem persists after performing Step 1, delete temporary Java files.
1. Open Control Panel in the Windows operating system and double-click Java. The Java
Control Panel dialog box is displayed.In the displayed Java Control Panel dialog box,
click Setting, as shown in Figure 9-6.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
Page 244
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 244/254
Figure 9-6 Checking the amount of disk space set for storing temporary files
2. Check the amount of disk space used for storing temporary Java files in the directory where
temporary Java files are saved. If this amount is greater than the preset one, delete folders
in this directory manually or by clicking Delete Files shown in the figure above.
NOTE
Before deleting folders in this directory, close all running LMT clients.
3. Log in to the LMT again to check whether this problem is solved.
Step 3 Install Windows operating system patch KB960714, for more details please see 9.15 How to
Install OS Patches.
If this problem cannot be solved by performing the above steps, uninstall and reinstall Java.
----End
9.17 What Do I Do If There Is No Response or Any ErrorMessage After a Tracing, Monitoring or Other Task Is
Created
Some time after a successful login to the LMT, you may suddenly find that batch processing
fails with no error message. Alternatively, after a tracing or monitoring task is created, the task
page is not opened. There is no response or any error message. The NE task list shows that this
task has been successfully created. Or right-click in the message browsing window and choose
save messages, the Save dialog box is not displayed. If you open a new browser and log in to
the LMT again, the task nevertheless can be successfully created. If either of the previous
problems occurs, perform the following operations.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
Page 245
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 245/254
Procedure
Step 1 Open Control Panel in the Windows operating system and double-click Java. The Java
Control Panel dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the displayed Java Control Panel dialog box, click the Advanced tab.
l If the Java plug-in of version 1.6 is installed, choose Security > SecurityMixed code
(sandboxed vs. trusted) security verification, and select Disable verification (not
recommended).
l If the Java plug-in of version 1.7 is installed, choose SecurityMixed code (sandboxed vs.
trusted) security verification, and select Disable verification (not recommended).
Step 3 Close all browsers and log in to the LMT again.
----End
9.18 How to Handle the Problem That Only the Error Code
Is Displayed in an Error Message After a Tracing orMonitoring Task Is Created
Messages related to base station errors have been configured. However, the local maintenance
terminal (LMT) displays only the error code rather than the error message when a base station
error occurs. If the previous problem occurs, perform the following operations:
Procedure
Step 1 Open Control Panel in the Windows operating system and double-click Java. The Java
Control Panel dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the displayed Java Control Panel dialog box, click the Advanced tab, choose SecurityMixed
code (sandboxed vs. trusted) security verification , and select Disable verification (not
recommended).
Step 3 Close all browsers and log in to the LMT again.
----End
9.19 Any Further Operation Performed When Some LMT Web Pages Fail to Update Causes the Web Pages to TurnBlank
Some LMT Web pages fail to update when batch processing, tracing, or monitoring is in use.
Any further operation causes the Web pages to turn blank. If you restart the function, the Web
page returns to normal. To prevent this problem, perform the following operations to add an
environment variable.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
Page 246
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 246/254
Procedure
Step 1 On the LMT PC, select My Computer and right-click Properties from the shortcut menu. The
System Properties dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the System Properties dialog box, click the Advanced tab and click EnvironmentVariables. The Environment Variables dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 In the Environment Variables dialog box, click New. The New User Variable dialog box is
displayed. In the New User Variable dialog box, set Variable name to
JPI_PLUGIN2_NO_HEARTBEAT and Variable value to 1. Then click OK .
Step 4 In the Environment Variables dialog box, click OK .
Step 5 In the System Properties dialog box, click OK to finish adding the environment variable.
----End
9.20 How to Handle the LMT Exit After Clicking Trace,Monitor, or Device Maintenance Tab in Window 7
When you have successfully logged in to the LMT, the interface is redirected to the other
interface if you click the Trace, Monitor, or Device Maintenance tab. A few seconds after the
redirection, the interface is automatically redirected to the login window of the LMT and a login
failure message is prompted.
Context
The IERationalEnabler Class plug-in is installed in Internet Explorer when test tools, such as
IBM Rational Functional Tester (RTF), are installed in the PC. The problem can be resolved by
disabling the plug-in.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose ToolsInternet from the menu bar of Internet Explorer.
The Internet dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click Manage Add-ons on the Programs tab page.
The Manage Add-ons dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Choose Toolbras and Extensions in the Add-Ins navigation tree. Click IERationalEnabler
Class on the right of the dialog box and disable the plug-in.
Step 4 Close all the opened Internet Explorer and log in to the LMT again.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
Page 247
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 247/254
9.21 How to Handle the Disconnection Between the LMT
and Base Station After the Device Digital Certificate IsReplaced
During base station deployment using Plug and Play (PnP), device digital certificate addition or
deletion, the local maintenance terminal (LMT) is disconnected from the base station.
Context
In the Internet Explorer, when you log in to the LMT in HTTPS mode, the root certificate of the
new device digital certificate is not imported into the browser when the the device digital
certificate is replaced. Therefore, the browser does not trust the new certificate, and the security
socket layer (SSL) authentication fails. As a result, the connection between the website and the
base station is disconnected.
NOTE
The Firefox browser is not recommended to use in this scene.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the Internet Explorer. Import the root certificate of the new device digital certificate to the
browser before the device digital certificate is replaced. For details, see 9.8 How to Set a Correct
SSL Security Certificate.
Step 2 Close the browser and log in to the LMT again.
----End
9.22 How to Handle Exceptions in the LMT Due to
Insufficient PC Memory
If the memory space for the local maintenance terminal (LMT) PC is insufficient, exceptions
occur when the LMT runs on the PC.
ContextWhen a PC has been running for a long time or multiple programs occupying huge memory
space are running on the PC, memory usage of the PC almost reaches 100%. In this case, if the
LMT starts, the PC cannot allocate sufficient memory space to the LMT, and exceptions occur,
such as slower user interface (UI) response and unavailability of tracing and monitoring
functions.
Mappings between the PC memory and the number of LMT clients that can simultaneously start
on the PC are as follows:
l On a PC of 4 GHz memory, 32 LMT clients can simultaneously start.
l On a PC of 2 GHz memory, 16 LMT clients can simultaneously start.
l On a PC of 1 GHz memory, eight LMT clients can simultaneously start.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
Page 248
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 248/254
l On a PC of 512 MHz memory, four LMT clients can simultaneously start.
NOTE
The preceding mappings are obtained when no other software is running on the PC and only basic functions,
such as MML, alarm, and device panel, are used on the LMT. When other functions are running on an
LMT such as tracing, monitoring, and batch processing, the LMT will consume over 50 MHz memory onthe PC. Therefore, fewer LMT clients can simultaneously start on the PC.
Procedure
Step 1 Log off or restart the PC, or stop programs occupying huge memory space.
Step 2 Log in to the LMT again.
----End
9.23 Error Message "This user session already exists" UponLogin to LMT
The interface displays an error message this user session already exists upon login to LMT.
Solve the problem by using the method described in the procedure part.
Context
To enhance system security, the client browser uses Cookie to store the session information of
users who have successfully logged in. Due to the session Cookie mechanism, the user
encounters the following problems when using LMT:
l Problem 1: For the same NE, the user desires to log in to multiple LMTs. After successfully
logging in to the first LMT, the user logs in to the second LMT of the NE, and the interface
displays This user session already exists. This is because all browser windows opened by
the same user share the same session under the session sharing mechanism of IE8 or IE9
and Firefox enabled by default. As a result, when the user attempts to repeatedly log in to
the LMTs of the same NE, the system determines a repeated login of the same user session.
For the IE6/7 browser in which each browser window uses independent sessions, this
problem does not arise.
l Problem 2: The LMT interface displays the error This user session already exists, while
the user has not carried out the operation described in Problem 1. This is because the
previous session information remains valid due to an abnormal exit from LMT. As a result,the LMT determines a repeated login attempt when the same user tries to login to the LMT.
This problem arises when the browser automatically recovers from breaking down during
use of the LMT, or when the pop-up LMT window is blocked by the browser pop-up blocker
enabled.
l Problem 3: After you use the Internet Explorer (IE) to log in to the LMT, and then enter
the IP address of the eNodeB into the Windows Explorer to open the IE, the message This
user session already exists is displayed. This problem is caused by the conflict of the IE
sessions created in both manners. This problem exists on all IE browsers.
Procedure
l For Problem 1, the following method is used:
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
Page 249
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 249/254
In the menu bar of the IE browser, click File > New Session, to start a new IE browser
window and log in to the LMT.
NOTE
This method applies only to the IE8 or IE9 browser, not Firefox. Users of the Firefox browser can log into only one LMT of a single NE.
l For Problem 2, the following method is used:
1. Close all currently opened browser windows to make the previous session information
invalid.
2. If the pop-up blocker is enabled for the browser, disable it.
3. Restart the browser and log in to LMT.
l For Problem 3, the following method is used:
The IE8/9 browser user needs to click File > New Session in the menu bar of the browser,
to start a new IE browser window and log in to the LMT.
----End
9.24 Interfaces for Performing Tracing or Monitoring Tasks
Blinking
Interfaces for performing tracing or monitoring tasks blink.
Context
Java Applet in the IE browser is incompatible with HTML elements when they are stackedtogether. As a result, interfaces (stacked in the Java Applet) for performing tracing and
monitoring tasks blink. This problem does not affect the function but deteriorates user
experience.
Procedure
l To avoid this problem, use the following methods:
1. This problem occurs only on the IE browser. Use the Firefox browser to avoid this
problem.
2. This problem occurs only on Java later than the version of 1.6.21. Visit
www.oracle.com and download Java SE Runtime Environment 6u21 or an earlier version to avoid this problem.
----End
9.25 The web site's certificate cannot be verified.Do you
want to continue? Is Displayed During Tracing orMonitoring
During initialization of a task such as tracing or monitoring on the LMT, "The web site's
certificate cannot be verified.Do you want to continue?" is displayed.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
Page 250
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 250/254
Context
If the certificate of the U2000 proxy server or base station is not Java authenticated, verification
on the website fails. In this case, the dialog box is displayed when the Java Virtual Machine
(JVM) requests the verification for the website from which the Java archive (JAR) file isdownloaded.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Always trust content from this publisher., and then click Yes.
Step 2 Import the CA certificate by referring to 9.8 How to Set a Correct SSL Security Certificate.
NOTE
Log in to the base station through the U2000 proxy server, and click Logout at the upper right to switch
to the LMT login interface for downloading or importing the CA certificate.
----End
9.26 Batch Execution of MML Commands Fails BecauseSome MML Commands Contain Invisible Carriage Returns
or Line Feeds
After line feeds (LF) are deleted from MML command scripts copied to Batch, command
execution fails.
Context
Copy the MML commands failing to be executed to an UltraEdit file. It is found that these MML
commands are displayed in two lines. In UltraEdit, click to view these MML commands
in the binary format. A redundant carriage return (CR) 0x0D stays at the LF location of the MML
command each. See Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-7 Viewing an MML command in the binary format using UltraEdit
In the Windows operating system (OS), the CR 0x0D and LF 0x0A must be used pairwise. The
unpaired CRs or LFs cannot be deleted. As a result, the MML commands fail to be executed.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
Page 251
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 251/254
Procedure
Step 1 Copy the MML commands failing to the executed to an UltraEdit or notepad file and delete all
LFs and CRs. Then, copy these commands back to Batch and execute them again.
----End
9.27 How to Handle Shortcut Key Invalidation
Shortcut keys are defined on the LMT. When logging in to the LMT through a web page, you
may fail to use the corresponding function by pressing a shortcut key. In this case, the shortcut
key becomes invalid. For example, you cannot stop pinging by pressing Ctrl+Q in the MML
Command window. This is because the same shortcut key is preferentially used by another
running program on the PC, which leads to a shortcut key conflict.
Procedure
Step 1 Check all running programs on the PC. Find the program using the same shortcut key settings
as the LMT.
Step 2 Modify the program shortcut key settings which are the same as those on the LMT or stop the
program when you use the LMT.
----End
9.28 What Do I Do If A Message "Stop running this script?"
Is Displayed?This section describes how to solve the problem that a message "Stop running this script?" is
displayed during script execution on the LMT.
Context
When it takes a long time to execute certain scripts, you are prompted with the message "Stop
running this script?", indicating whether to continue the script execution.
To solve this problem, download the file at http://download.microsoft.com/download/
5/9/5/595D11B8-A0FD-4EA0-BF0D-F113258FC28A/MicrosoftFixit50403.msi.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the downloaded file.
Step 2 Restart the computer, and then log in to the LMT to check whether this problem has been solved.
----End
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
Page 252
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 252/254
9.29 A Message checking client environment... Is Displayed
on the Login Window and the browser Does Not RespondDuring the login to the WebLMT, a message "checking client environment..." is displayed on
the login window and the browser does not respond and has to be forcibly closed. In this case,
solve the problem by using the method described in the procedure part.
Context
After the WebLMT is started, the software environment of the client is checked, including the
versions and basic settings of Java applications, Adobe Flash Player, and browser. If the browser
does not respond, faults occur on the software.
Procedure
Step 1 If all the preceding software settings are correct, uninstall all Java applications on the client by
performing the following steps:
1. Choose Start > Control Panel. The Control Panel is displayed. Double-click Add or
Remove Programs in the displayed window. The Add or Remove Programs dialog box
is displayed.
2. Right-click the Java application and choose Uninstall.
3. Remove the registry entry HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\JavaSoft and
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\JavaSoft .
4. Remove files under the C:\Program Files\Java directory.
5. Install the Java application of the recommended version that can be obtained from http://
java.com/.
Step 2 After Java applications are successfully installed, log in to the WebLMT again.
Step 3 If the problem persists, download and then reinstall Adobe Flash Player of the latest version.
----End
9.30 LMT Login Window Being Stopped by the Browser
The LMT login window is stopped by the browse, and the login stills fails even though the user
selects Allow popups. To solve the problem, perform the following steps:
Procedure
l IE browser
1. Choose Tool > Internet Options on the tool bar of the IE browser. The Internet
Options dialog box is displayed.
2. On the Privacy tab page, clear Turn on Pop-up Blocker in the Pop-up Blocker pane.
Or, select Turn on Pop-up Blocker, and click Settings to add allowed websites.
3. Click OK . Close the browser and log in to the LMT again.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
Page 253
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 253/254
l FireFox browser
1. Choose Tool > Options on the tool bar of the FireFox browser. The Options dialog
box is displayed.
2. On the Content tab page, clear Block popup windows. Or, select Turn on Pop-up
Blocker, and click Exceptions to add allowed websites.
3. Click OK . Close the browser and log in to the LMT again.
----End
9.31 The Application Blocked by Security Settings Dialog Box Is Displayed When Batch Processing, Tracing,
Monitoring, or Device Maintenance Is Enabled
After the JRE is installed or upgraded, the Application Blocked by Security Settings dialog
box is displayed when the tab page related to batch processing, tracing, monitoring, or device
maintenance is open. Click OK , and the The application cannot be run dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the batch processing, tracing, monitoring, or device maintenance function is
unavailable.
Context
A function is introduced to the JRE later than Java 1.7. 10 to control when and how to run
untrusted Java applications contained in a web page. The untrusted Java application refers to an
application with digital signature applied by an unknown issuer or without a certificate issued
by a trusted certificate authority. The default security level is set to High, indicating that the
untrusted Java applications will be blocked.
Procedure
Step 1 Reconfigure the Java security level or add Exception Site List.
l On the Control Panel page, click Java. In the displayed Java Control Panel dialog box,
click Security. On the displayed Security tab page, select Enable Java content in the
browser, set Security Level to Medium, and then click Apply.
l Alternatively, click Edit Site List on the Security tab page in the Java Control Panel dialog
box to add the sites accessing the LMT to the site list. If this method is used, the Java securitylevel does not need to be reconfigured. For the sites added in the site list, mark whether the
access to the LMT through HTTPS or HTTP. For example, https://10.20.198.33 or http://
10.30.192.60.
Step 2 Specify Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in(requires browser restart).
1. In the Java Control Panel dialog box, click Advanced. On the displayed Advanced tab
page, select Java Plug-in, clear Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in(requires
browser restart), and then click OK .
2. Select Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in(requires browser restart) according to
operations in step 2.a, and click OK .
3. Restart the browser to make the settings take effect.
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ
Issue Draft C (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
Page 254
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide(V100R009C00_Draft C)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-lmt-user-guidev100r009c00draft-cpdf-en 254/254
Step 3 Delete temporary Java files.
1. In the Java Control Panel dialog box, click General. On the displayed General tab page,
click Settings. The Temporary Files Settings dialog box is displayed.
2. Close all running LMT windows and click Delete Files.
Step 4 Log in to the LMT again. When enabling any of the batch processing, tracing, monitoring, and
device maintenance functions, select I accept the risk and want run this application on the
3900 Series Base Station
LMT User Guide 9 FAQ